Fostex Recording Equipment VF80EX User Manual

8588 042 000

(396676)

Owner’s Manual

Digital Multitracker

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT B

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety Instructions/Precautions

Precautions

About power supply

Precautions upon handling the HD

•

Be sure to connect the VF80EX to the power supply

specified in the Specifications section of this owner’s

manual. Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage.

Do not connect the VF80EX to the same AC outlet to which

devices that could generate noise (such as a large motor

or dimmer), or the devices that consume a large amount

of power (such as an air conditioning system or large

electric heater) are connected.

•

BeforeturningthepowerofftotheVF80EX, firstquitsetup

mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped.

Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the

VF80EX while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD

ACCESS LED is lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will

you lose recorded data, but you may damage to the

VF80EX. Fostex is not responsible for the data lost during

operation of the VF80EX.

•

If you use the VF80EX in an area with a different power

voltage, first consult your dealer or the nearest Fostex

service station. You can use the VF80EX with a power

frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz.

It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or

damage. In such a case, stop using the VF80EX

immediately and ask your dealer to repair the cord.

To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the

VF80EX,avoid contact with water or other liquids, or do

not handlethe power plug while your hands are wet.

To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the

VF80EX, do not remove the main unit cover or reach the

inside the VF80EX.

Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects such as

pins, accidentally enter the inside of the VF80EX because

this may lead to electric shock or damage. Should water

enter the inside of the VF80EX, remove the power plug

from AC outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest

FOSTEX service station.

To prevent damage to the VF80EX, be sure to power on

the connected devices first, then turn on the power to the

VF80EX. When you remove or connect the cables to the

input/output connectors on the VF80EX, make sure that

the track and master faders and volume controls are set

to “0.”

•

Before you change the location of the VF80EX, pack the

unit in the shipping carton or an impact-resistant case.

Make sure that the VF80EX is kept free from external

vibration or impact since the VF80EX is very sensitive to

vibration.

•

Do not install the VF80EX in locations subject to the

following:

* Extremely high or low temperature, or significant

changes in temperature.

* Excessive humidity or dust.

* Excessive changes in power supply voltage.

* Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking

surfaces.

* Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or

speaker).

•

If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low

temperature to a warm place, or if you use the VF80EX in

a room in which the temperature varies significantly

during winter, condensation may occur on the hard disk

or other parts. In such cases, leave the VF80EX for about

an hour in the new location before you turn on the power.

•

Note on repair

•

The VF80EX does not use any parts that user can repair

easily. Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service

station to ask about repairs.

UsethepackingcartondesignedfortheVF80EXwhenyou

transport the VF80EX to the dealer for repair or return.

If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack the

VF80EX completely using shock absorbing materials.

Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due

to incomplete packaging or caused during transport.

Important!

Equipment name, electrical

ratings, serial number and

MODEL VF80EX

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

FOSTEX

other information for the

230V~

20W

50/60Hz

VF80EX, are written on

bottom side.

SERIAL NO.

FOSTEX CO.

MADE IN CHINA

Delay of display indication

About copyrights

•

While using the VF80EX, you may have an experience to

see the delay of the reaction of the time counter or level

meters. This is not a malfunction and it bears no relation

to the actual sound to be recorded or played.

•

It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording

or video images or audio data for which copyright is

possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such

as contents, broadcasts, sales, or distribution-any

purpose other than for your personal pleasure.

Time counter

About damage

•

Fostex is not responsible for any “direct damage” or

“indirect damage” caused by using the VF80EX.

Level meters

This kind of delay is due to the VF80EX design concept in

which the audio processing takes priority over the display

processing when the audio processing gets busy (e.g. when

a sudden fader level change happens). You may always trust

the VF80EX to record or playback audio in good condition.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents (VF80EX)

“See this page”information by subject

The following shows reference pages where you can find information you need.

See also “The table of contents” shown on page 6.

I want to delete a program.

I want to record my performance.

Please read page 62.

Please read pages 28 and 30.

I want to replace a part of the previous recording

with a new recording.

I want to locate the desired position.

Please read pages 32 and 59.

I want to format a hard disk.

Please read page 20.

Please read page 33.

I want to copy a part of a song to another track.

Please read page 63.

I want to mixdown tracks to an external

master recorder.

I want to exchange tracks.

Please read page 68.

Please read pages 38 and 76.

I want to create multiple programs.

I want to know details about the demonstration song.

Please read page 61.

Please read page 24.

I want to control theVF80EX via MIDI.

I want to know details about the internal effects.

Please read pages 91, 92, and 94.

Please read page 44.

I want to make my original CD.

I want to save or load the mixing setting.

Please read page 125.

Please read page 52.

I want to record audio on a CD or MD disc

to theVF80EX digitally.

I want to cue audio at fast speed to search the

desired position.

Please read page 91.

Please read page 56.

I want to make a backup of song data.

I want to scrub audio to search the desired position.

Please read page 106.

Please read page 57.

I want to use a condenser microphone.

I want to record or playback audio by

altering the speed.

Please read page 27.

Please read page 58.

I want to equalize the sound.

I want to record audio with applying the

internal effects.

Please read pages 36 and 40.

I want to operate the“Chain play mode”.

Please read pages 37, 45, 76 and 84.

Please read page 97.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents (VF80EX)

I want to put a desired name to a program.

I want to save song data to a DAT.

Please read page 62.

Please read page 108.

I want to record a material while monitoring

the input signal.

I want to make a tempo map.

Please read page 136.

Please read page 72.

I want to mixdown tracks without using

an external master recorder.

I want to erase unnecessary songs.

Please read pages 62 and 66.

Please read page 79.

I want to know details about the training mode.

I want to set the MTC offset time.

Please read page 74.

Please read page 139.

I want to know details about the mastering mode.

I want to synchronize theVF80EX with an external

device.

Please read page 76.

Please read page 92.

I want to make track bouncing (ping-pong recording).

I want to feed the MIDI sync signal to an

external MIDI device.

Please read page 73.

Please read page 138.

I want to protect a recorded program.

I want to know format information of a hard disk.

Please read page 141.

Please read page 144.

I want to save song data by theWAV file format.

I want to exchange the hard disk.

Please read page 119.

Please read page 21.

I want to control panning.

I want to save song data to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

Please read pages 36 and 40.

Please read page 112.

I want to delete unnecessary programs.

I want to copy a song recorded on a CD

available on the market.

Please read page 62.

I want to know details about the insert effect.

Please read page 84.

Please read page 129.

I want to repeat playback of the desired part.

I want to operate the“Audio CD playback mode”.

Please read page 104.

Please read page 59.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents (VF80EX)

Contents

• Safety Instructions ........................................2

Recording ................................................................... 29

Playback ..................................................................... 29

• Precautions ........................................................ 3

About power supply ................................................... 3

Precautions upon handling the hard disk................. 3

Note on repair ............................................................. 3

About copyright.......................................................... 3

About damage ............................................................. 3

• Basic recording (recording onto two tracks)..... 30

Preparation for recording ......................................... 30

Recording ................................................................... 31

Playback ..................................................................... 31

• Mark function ..................................................... 32

Setting a mark on the fly ........................................... 32

Locating a mark ......................................................... 32

Deleting a mark.......................................................... 32

Basic Features ofVF80EX

• Product Features.................................................. 9

• ABS locate functions ......................................... 33

• Before Operating ................................................ 10

Recording method ..................................................... 10

Program ...................................................................... 10

Remain Indicator ....................................................... 10

Additional track ......................................................... 11

Input monitor and Repro monitor............................ 11

Event ........................................................................... 11

Trim ............................................................................ 12

Time Base ................................................................... 12

• Punch in/out ....................................................... 33

Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit .... 33

Punch in/out using the foot switch .......................... 33

Auto punch in/out function...................................... 34

• Mixing ................................................................. 36

Adjusting levels.......................................................... 36

Setting PAN position .................................................. 36

Adjusting EQ............................................................... 36

Setting effects ............................................................. 37

Names and Functions

• Mixdown ............................................................. 38

Analog mixdown ........................................................ 38

Digital mixdown......................................................... 38

Top panel (Analog input/output section) ................ 14

Top panel (Mixer section) ......................................... 15

Top panel (Recorder/display section) ..................... 16

Rear panel .................................................................. 19

Side Panel ................................................................... 19

Mixer Functions

• Initial condition when turning on the power ...... 39

About the hard disk storage device

• Operations while the Normal screen is shown . 39

Fader........................................................................... 39

Track mute ................................................................. 39

Master fader mute ..................................................... 39

Reformatting the hard disk ....................................... 20

Replacing a hard disk ................................................ 21

Formatting the new hard disk ................................... 23

• Mix Parameter section ....................................... 40

Adjusting PAN positions ..........................................40

Editing EQ.................................................................41

Preset entries in the EQ library ........................... 42

Setting effects ..........................................................44

Basic Recording and Playback

• About a demonstration song! ............................ 24

• Connections of external equipment .................. 25

How to make the loop effect setting ........................ 45

Setting effect send levels ..................................... 46

Selecting an effect type........................................ 47

Selecting pre/post of the effect send .................. 47

Turning the effect processor on or off................ 48

About the effect types.......................................... 49

Effect parameter details ...................................... 50

Scene memory ......................................................... 52

Storing the current scene .................................... 52

Recalling a scene .................................................. 52

Deleting a scene ................................................... 53

Fader adjust.......................................................... 53

• LCD ..................................................................... 26

Display when turning on the power ......................... 26

Switching the time base ............................................. 26

“Disk remain” indication........................................... 26

• Preliminary knowledge ...................................... 27

Inputs and tracks ....................................................... 27

How to use condenser microphones ......................... 27

• Basic recording (recording onto a single track) .... 28

Preparation for recording ......................................... 28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents (VF80EX)

Monitoring the metronome sound .............................. 72

Scene sequence .......................................................54

Assigning scene memories to the mark map ...... 54

Deleting a mark from the mark map .................. 55

Scene sequence on/off selection ......................... 55

Executing the scene sequence ............................. 55

•Track bounce (Ping-pong recording) ................. 73

On/Off of bounce mode .............................................. 73

Setting pan position .................................................... 73

Setting level of each track ........................................... 73

Performing the track bounce ...................................... 73

Recorder Functions

•Training mode ..................................................... 74

Connecting the instrument and headphones.............. 74

On/Off of training mode ............................................. 74

Slowing down the playback speed .............................. 75

Changing the pitch ...................................................... 75

Canceling the center-positioned sound....................... 75

Setting the cancel position .......................................... 75

Boosting the bass sound .............................................. 75

Playing along with the playback sound....................... 75

• Cueing ................................................................ 56

Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys ................56

Shuttle cueing .......................................................... 56

Digital scrubbing ......................................................57

Performing digital scrubbing .............................. 57

Storing the digital scrub point ............................ 57

•Vari Pitch ............................................................. 58

Turning on or off the vari pitch function .................. 58

Setting the speed......................................................58

• Mastering mode ................................................. 76

Selecting a program to be played back........................ 76

On/Off of mastering mode .......................................... 76

Setting the mastering parameters ............................... 77

On/Off the mastering processing ................................ 77

Recording onto the master recorder ........................... 77

Mastering library details ............................................. 77

• Loop Function .................................................... 59

Setting the start and end points............................... 59

Capturing the current position on-the-fly ......... 59

Editing the position via the screen ..................... 59

Setting the start and end points by marks ......... 60

Carrying out the loop playback ................................ 60

• Internal mastering function ............................... 79

Rehearsing internal mastering ................................... 80

• Program .............................................................. 61

Creating a new program ........................................... 61

Selecting a program .................................................62

Deleting a program ................................................... 62

Editing a program title .............................................. 62

Performing internal mastering ................................... 81

About Start and End points ................................... 82

Checking the “Start point” and “End point”.......... 83

How to add a silent part to a mastered song .......... 83

• Using the insert effect ........................................ 84

Rehearsal .................................................................. 85

Recording the guitar .................................................. 86

•Track editing ....................................................... 63

Copy & Paste, Move & Paste ....................................63

Performing Copy (or Move) & Paste ................... 64

Undo/redo of Copy (or Move) & Paste ............... 65

Erasing track data .................................................... 66

Erasing .................................................................. 66

Undo/redo of Erase.............................................. 67

Track Exchange ........................................................ 68

Performing the track exchange ........................... 68

Recording with effect ................................................. 87

Parameters for distortion effects (DISTORTION) ... 88

Parameters for distortion effects (AMP SIM.) ........ 89

Parameters for distortion effects (MIC SIM.) ......... 89

• Digital recording................................................. 91

Recording an external source onto the unit digitally ... 91

Selecting a program to be recorded ...................... 91

Selecting the digital input ..................................... 91

Selecting a track to record ..................................... 91

Starting to record .................................................. 91

• Editing marks ..................................................... 69

Viewing the mark list ................................................69

Editing a mark position ............................................ 69

Enter a mark title ......................................................70

Adding a mark .......................................................... 70

Deleting a mark......................................................... 71

Locating a mark ........................................................ 71

• MIDI clock sync system ..................................... 92

Connecting to external equipment.............................. 92

Setup of the VF80EX .................................................... 93

Executing of recording ................................................ 93

Confirming the MIDI clock sync .................................. 93

Advanced Operations

• MIDI sync/MIDI machine control system ........... 93

Connecting to external equipment.............................. 94

Setup of external equipment ....................................... 94

Setup of the VF80EX .................................................... 94

Confirming MTC sync/MMC ....................................... 94

Executing of recording ................................................ 94

• Metronome function........................................... 72

Setting the tempo map ................................................ 72

Setting the metronome output .................................... 72

Setting the time base to bar/beat ................................ 72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents (VF80EX)

Deleting of Time Signature .................................. 135

Clearing All Time Signature data ......................... 135

Changing the Bar Offset Figure............................ 135

• External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode..95

Connecting to external equipment.............................. 95

Setup of external equipment ....................................... 95

Setup of the VF80EX .................................................... 95

Confirming chase lock ................................................. 95

Executing of recording ................................................ 96

• Setting a tempo ................................................ 136

New Registering of Tempo................................... 136

Correction of the Registered Tempo.................... 137

Erasing of the Registered Tempo ......................... 137

•Chainplayfunction......................................................................97

Making the chain play list ........................................... 98

Setting the chain play mode...................................... 100

Editing the chain play list .......................................... 101

• Setting the Metronome function ...................... 137

• Setting MIDI sync output signal ....................... 138

• Setting an MTC frame rate ............................... 138

• Setting an MTC offset value ............................. 139

• Setting MTC offset mode ................................. 139

• Setting the Slave mode .................................... 140

• Setting the Slave type ...................................... 140

• Setting the Record Protect function ................ 141

• Setting Digital Input ......................................... 142

• Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode............... 142

• Setting the MIDI device number....................... 143

• Checking the number of track events.............. 143

• The Drive Format Information.......................... 144

• Fader Fix mode Setting .................................... 144

• Fader Recall mode Setting............................... 145

•AudioCDplaybackmode.........................................................104

Switching the playback mode ................................... 104

Available functions in the audio CD playback mode 104

Save/Load of song data

About song data ........................................................ 106

Items that can be saved or loaded as song data......... 107

• Save/load using the S/P DIF digital signal ................108

Notes for digital audio recorder to be used .............. 107

Notes for saving data using the S/P DIF digital signal107

SavingdatausingtheS/PDIFdigitalsignal..............108

Connecting to an external digital recorder.......... 108

Setting the external recorder............................... 108

Saving data .......................................................... 108

LoadingdatausingtheS/PDIFdigitalsignal...........110

Connecting to an external digital recorder.......... 110

Setting the external recorder............................... 110

Loading data........................................................ 110

• Save/load using CD-RW/CD-R ......................... 112

Please read this first! ................................................ 112

Care and handling of CD-RW/CD-R discs ............ 112

Save/load of song data using a CD-R/RW drive .. 113

Others

• MIDI Implementation Chart .............................. 146

• MMC Command List......................................... 147

• Inquiry Message List........................................ 147

• Maintenance ..................................................... 148

• Specifications .................................................. 148

• Block Diagram .................................................. 149

• Dimensions ...................................................... 150

Saving data using a CD-R/RW drive (Backup) .......... 114

Loading backup data from a CD-R/RW drive ............ 117

Saving aWAV file...................................................... 119

Important notes for using a WAV file .................. 119

Loading aWAV file ................................................... 123

Special loading method when using a computer.. 124

• Making an audio CD ............................................125

• Loading from an audio CD ..................................129

SETUP Mode

•To enter the SETUP mode ................................ 134

•Time Signature Setting ..................................... 134

New Registering of Time Signature...................... 134

Correcting the Registered Time Signature........... 135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Features of VF80EX

The VF80EX Digital Multitracker incorporates a digital mixer with an 8-track (plus 16-additional track) digital

recorder. The digital mixer section features a high-performance DSP multi-effect processor employing the A.S.P.

(FostexAdvancedSignalProcessing)technologyoriginallydevelopedbyFostex. Thedigitalrecordersectionallows

you to record and playback uncompressed linear 16-bit/44.1 kHz digital audio. You can make all process for

music production such as overdubbing, track bounce, effect processing, mixdown and mastering in the digital

domain without sound deterioration.

In addition, using the built-in CD-R/RW drive, you can also save/load song data to/from a CD-R or CD-RW disc,

or burn an original audio CD.

Product Features

Recorder Section

Mixer Section

• Employs the Fostex original FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk

Management System-3) format, allowing high quality

recording/playback with uncompressed linear 16-bit/

44.1 kHz digital audio on 8 tracks, as well as 16

additional tracks. You can record about 3 hours of

mono audio per 1 GB disk space.

• Built in a high-performance DSP multi-effect

processor employing the A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced

Signal Processing) technology

• 7 track faders and a stereo master fader allow you to

control signal levels intuitively.

• The track ON/OFF switch is provided for each track.

The 2-band EQ with the EQ library and the effect send

with PRE/POST selection are provided for Tracks 1

through 6.

• Nondestructive audio editing functions such as copy,

paste, move, erase and undo/redo are possible.

• The "Program" function allows you to give a title to

each song and manage up to 99 titles.

• Both balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (1/4" phone)

connectors are provided for each analog input.

The phantom power is also available when using the

balanced connector. Also the trim knob on each input

makes it possible to accept a wide range of input

signals from microphone to line levels.

• +/- 6.0% pitch control.

• Accepts S/PDIF digital signal and records it directly

onto any VF80EX track.

• The auto punch in/out function with rehearsal mode.

The IN and OUT points can be set with 1/100 frame

accuracy. You can also carry out punch in/out

manually using the foot switch.

• "Bounce" function allows bouncing signals from tracks

1 through 6 to tracks 7/8 with a single key operation.

• The mastering mode allows transferring audio on the

master tracks (7/8) to an external recorder with

applying the EQ, reverb and compressor.

• The chain play function allows continuous playback

of desired programs.

• Audio CD playback is possible. You can play back

audio CDs created by the VF80EX (or commercially

available audio CDs) using the built-in CD-R/RW drive.

• The “REC EFFECT” function allows you to rerecord a

recorded track while applying an effect (insert effect).

Some distortion and simulation effects are available

only for the insert effect.

Others

• "Trainingmode"helpsyoutopracticeyourinstrument

by slowing down playback, shifting the pitch of the

recorded performance or masking the solo instrument

/ voice.

• Dot-matrix LCD and self-illuminating keys allow you

to know the current status visually, as well as to make

settings of the mixer and recorder easily.

• Durable and reliable 3.5-inch E-IDE standard hard

• "Scene memory" function allows you to save and load

up to 99 mixer scenes including fader positions and

EQ/effect settings.

disk is built in.

• Save/load of song data using the S/PDIF (optical)

signal is possible.

• You can feed the mixed-down signal from the S/PDIF

output connector to an external digital device such as

a DAT recorder for digital recording.

• You can save/load data, as well as WAV files, to/from

CD-RW or CD-R discs.

• Feeds MIDI clock with song position pointer or MTC

(MIDI Time Code).

• The “Internal Mastering” function allows you to make

masteringtoVF80EX’sinternaltracks, withouttheneed

of an external master recorder.

• Supports MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

• Can be slaved to an external MTC.

• Using the built-in CD-R/RW drive, you can burn an

• The internal metronome function can be used for

audio CD from internally mastered songs.

recording a guide track.

• The bar/beat resolution function allows editing by

beat (the clock digit is omitted).

• Up to 99 mark points can be set per each song.

Youcanlocatetoanymarkpointormakethemarkmap

of a scene.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Features of VF80EX

Before Operating

This section describes the basics that you should know before you start operating the VF80EX.

All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based Multitracker and those who are new

to Multitracker, should read this section thoroughly to understand the functions of the VF80EX.

Recording method

Remain indicator

The VF80EX uses a hard disk as a recording medium,

instead of a conventional tape.

Theremainindicatorshowshowmuchrecordingtime

is left on the current hard disk.

You can start recording sound sources from any point

on a disk as long as the point is within the range of 24

hours in ABS time. Also you can locate to any point

within the range. You may think of the VF80EX as in-

corporating tapes on which 24-hour time information

is striped.

The VF80EX program is managed by a 24-hour time

counter, however, the actual recording time left de-

pends on the available disk space.

The remain indicator appears on the LCD during re-

cording (or on REC standby), showing the rough re-

maining time if you record on a mono track.

ABS0

REC END

15m 00s

23h 59m 59s

......

00m 00s

05m 00s

10m 00s

Note that if the remaining time is 100 hours or more,

the indicator shows the available (remaining) disk

space in MB.

recorded area unrecorded area recorded area unrecorded area

You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.

Youcanrecordinanyareawithin24hoursinABStime.

ABS 0: The beginning time at 00h 00m 00s

REC END: The end time of recording (in the example

above, 00h 15m 00s)

The remaining time is 13h 28m 15s.

24 hour recording

5 minute recording 5 minute recording

unrecorded

......

recorded area recorded area unrecorded area (remain)

With a tape recorder, the maximum recording time

depends on the tape length, regardless of the amount

of unrecorded areas. With the VF80EX, you can use

the media more efficiently because no disk space is

used for unrecorded areas.

The remaining value is calculated on a mono-track

basis. That is, the value indicates recordable time if

you record on a mono track. You can calculate the

recordable time when recording on more than one

track easily by dividing the time by the track num-

ber.

Program

You can use up to 99 "tapes with 24-hour time infor-

mation" with the VF80EX. Each "tape" is called a "Pro-

gram".

A program exists independently on the hard disk,

therefore, you can freely record, playback or edit each

program without affecting other programs.

You can give a name (program title) to each program,

so you can easily identify a program.

In the example above, if you record on 2 tracks, the

recordabletimeisabout6hours44minutes(13hours

28 minutes 15 seconds divided by 2). Or if you record

on 8 tracks, the recordable time is about 1 hour 41

minutes (13 hours 28 minutes 15 seconds divided by

8).

"Program title" with its program number appears at

the top left of the normal screen as shown below.

The VF80EX manages up to 99 programs on the hard

disk. Each program includes not only the recording

data but also various setting information which con-

sumes a small amount of disk space. Therefore, note

thattheremainingtimeshownonthescreenisarough

value.

Program number/title ("01" is the program number while

"#0001" is a default title)

Always check the remaining time left before starting

recording, to ensure that you have enough disk space

to work with.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Features of VF80EX

Additional track

Event

AprogramontheVF80EX consistsof24tracks. Tracks

1 through 8 are called "Real tracks" which you can

record, playback and edit. Tracks 9 through 24 are

called"Additionaltracks". Usingthe"TrackExchange"

function, you can exchange between "real track(s)"

and "additional track(s)" in one-track, 2-track or 8-

track block.

Each time you make a recording, an independent

audio file is created on each recorded track. A silent

part on a track is also recognized as a file.

These files (audio files and silent files) are called

"events".

With the VF80EX, you can create up to 512 events per

track. You cannot make any further recording when

512 events are created. In the normal use, 512 events

are enough.

The VF80EX can show the current number of events

on the LCD. It also shows a warning message if you are

going to make recording when 512 events already

exist. You may resolve this problem by saving the

program (see "Save/Load of a program").

Let's count the events for each recording step (A

through E) below.

This makes it possible to record solo on several tracks,

exchange tracks and compare the results, or to record

different rhythm versions using multiple tracks, ex-

change the rhythm tracks completely and making a

remix version.

Note that tracks 9 through 24 cannot be recorded,

played or edited. The tracks you want to work with

must be set as tracks 1 through 8.

One track exchange

A.Beforerecording, thereisasingleevent(silentfile)onthetrack

(the VF80EX recognizes a silent part as a file).

8 track block exchange

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 17

Track 18

Track 19

Track 20

Track 21

Track 22

Track 23

Track 24

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 13

Track 14

Track 15

Track 16

B.After making a recording (REC B), there are two events on

the track; the recorded audio file and the following silent part.

C.After making another recording (REC C) continuously from

the end point of REC B, there are three events on the track;

two audio files and the following silent part.

D.After locating a point ahead of REC C and then making an

other recording (REC D), there are totally five events on the

track. Note that a silent file is created between Rec C and Rec

2 track block exchange

8 track block exchange

E.After making a recording (REC E) over REC B and REC C,

there are four events on the track.

Input monitor and Repro monitor

Silence

There are two modes for monitoring a track of the

VF80EX ; "Repro monitor" and "Input monitor".

Rec B

Silence

Rec C

Silence

Rec D

"Repro monitor" means that the track playback sig-

nal is monitored.

Silence

"Input monitor" means that the input source of the

track is monitored. You can check the signal level for

recording in this mode.

Rec E

Silence

Input monitor is only available for tracks to be re-

corded (on REC standby) or currently being recorded.

Signal output from the recorder

Signal input in the recorder

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

1 track

2 track

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

Input signal (Input monitor)

3 track

4 track

READY

Input signal (Input monitor)

READY

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

5 track

6 track

7 track

8 track

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Features of VF80EX

Bar/Beat/Clk shows the musical position generated

from the internal tempo map of the VF80EX (includ-

ing time signature and tempo).

Trim

It is important to set the analog input level appropri-

ately when converting an analog input signal from

[INPUT] A or B into a digital signal (A/D conversion).

You can adjust the analog level using the [TRIM] con-

trol. The [PEAK] indicator lights if the level is too high.

The example below shows the current recorder posi-

tion is at beat 1 of bar -2.

This position (beat 1 of bar -2) corresponds to ABS 0

and the following bar/beat numbers are determined

according to the time signature and tempo settings.

If the [TRIM] setting is not appropriate and the ana-

log input level is too high (if the PEAK indicator lights),

the signal will be converted into a distorted digital

signal, resulting digital noise. You cannot eliminate

this distortion/noise from the sound in the following

stages. Therefore, be sure to adjust the level appro-

priately using the [TRIM] knob not to light the [PEAK]

indicator when receiving the loudest audio input sig-

nal.

Appropriate gain

Excessive gain

Clip level

Beat 1 of bar -2 corresponds to ABS 0 as the default

setting, however, you can change to set it between bar

-9 and bar -2.

MTC (MIDI Time Code) runs in sync with the ABS time.

The MTC value (**h **m **s) corresponding to ABS 0

can be set, which is called "MTC offset".

Clip level

If you set the MTC offset to 01h 00m 00s, the MTC will

start from 01h 00m 00s, and at the ABS 00h 00m 00s

position, the MTC value will be 02h 00m 00s

The example below shows that the current position is

at MTC 00h 59m 57s

Time Base

The term "Time base" frequently appears in this

manual. The time base is used to show the location in

the recorder, like the "tape counter" of conventional

tape recorders.

There are three types of time bases:

1. ABS (Absolute time)

2. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock)

3. MTC (MIDITime Code)

You can switch between these time bases by pressing

the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

The ABS shows the absolute time of each program and

is striped from 00h 00m 00s (=ABS 0) to 23h 59m 59s

when a program is created.

The default MTC offset is 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf. You

can change the offset to any time value of 24-hour

clock.

The example below shows the current recorder posi-

tion is at 00m (minute) 00s (second) 00f (frame).

The hour digit appears only when the ABS time ex-

ceeds 01h 00m 00s 00f.

It is also possible to set the MTC offset by setting the

MTC value corresponding to "beat 1 of bar 1" instead

of "ABS 0".

ABS 0 is the reference position for managing all the

location and related to other time bases.

The following diagram illustrates the relationship

between the three time bases.

ABS 0

00M 00S

00M 03S

00M 06S

.....

ABS

BAR/ /CLK

MTC

- 002BAR

001BAR

002BAR

00H 59M 57S

01H 00M 00S

01H 00M 03S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

Names and Functions

Top panel

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Rear panel

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

Side panel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

Top panel (Analog input/output section)

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT B

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

5. [INPUT B/BAL] (Balanced) connector

• Connects to the balanced output of an external sound

source.

1. [INPUT A/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector

• Connectstotheunbalancedoutputofanexternalsound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48

dBu to +4 dBu)

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV

• Connector type: phone jack

• Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)

• A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a

condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]

switch on the rear panel to ON.

• When the [INPUT B/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the

input from this connector is interrupted.

• When this connector is plugged, the input from the

[INPUT A/BAL] connector is interrupted.

2. [INPUT A/BAL] (Balanced) connector

• Connects to the balanced output of an external sound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48

dBu to +4 dBu)

6. [INPUT B/TRIM] knob

• Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT B].

• You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between

-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).

• Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)

• A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a

condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]

switch on the rear panel to ON.

• When the [INPUT A/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the

input from this connector is interrupted.

7. [PHONES] (Headphones) knob

• Adjusts the level of headphones for monitoring.

3. [INPUT A/TRIM] knob

• Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT

8. [PHONES] (Headphones) connector

• Connects headphones for monitoring.

• Connector type: TRS phone jack

A].

• You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between

-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).

9. [ST OUT L. R] (Stereo out) connector

• Outputs the stereo (L and R) buss signal.

• Connects to a master recorder, etc.

• Reference output level: -10 dBV

4. [INPUT B/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector

• Connectstotheunbalancedoutputofanexternalsound

source.

• Connector type: phone jack

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV

• Connector type: phone jack

• When this connector is plugged, the input from the

[INPUT B/BAL] connector is interrupted.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

10. [FOOT SW] (Foot switch) connector

• Connects to an optional foot switch (Model 8051) for

punch in/out operation.

11. [PEAK] indicators

• Each indicator lights up when the corresponding input

signal reaches the clipping level.

• Connector type: phone jack

• Set the [TRIM] knob properly not to light the indicator.

12. [CH ON/OFF] keys

• Each key is used to turn on and off of the

Do not power on the machine with non-specified foot

SW connected to the foot SW jack. When powering on

the machine with non-specified foot SW (latch type foot

SW, etc.) connected to the foot SW jack, there is a case

that the machine does not correctly boot up with “No

Drive!” alter message. In such a case, power off the

machine once, disconnect the foot SW and then power

back on.

corresponding channel. When on, the key illuminates.

See the following description for details about how to use

each element.

Top panel (Mixer section)

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT B

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

13. [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

14. [BOUNCE] key

• While stopped, each key is used to change the track

status among OFF, PLAY and REC (READY).

Duringplayback, pressingthekeyswitchesbetweenOFF

and PLAY.

• Turns the bounce mode on or off.

When on (the key lights), tracks 7-8 are automatically

armed for recording, allowing track 1 through 5 signals

to bounce to track 7 and 8.

During recording, you cannot change the track status.

• When you view or edit mixer parameters such as pan

and EQ in the "Mix parameter edit" mode (described

later), you can select the target track by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

• The illumination of each key shows the track status as

follows.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

enters the “REC EFFECT” mode, in which rerecording a

recorded track with applying the “insert effect” is

possible. While the “REC EFFECT” mode is active, the

[BOUNCE] key flashes in red. To exit the “REC EFFECT”

mode, press the [BOUNCE] key again.

* flashing in red: the track is in REC READY.

* lighting in red: the track is being recorded.

* lighting in green: the track can be played back.

* not lighting (off): the track is muted.

15. [MIX PARAMETER-PAN] key

• When viewing or editing the pan pot setting, press this

key.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

16. [MIX PARAMETER-EQ] key

20. [2TRK MODE-TRAINING] key

• Turns on or off the "Training mode" in which only tracks

7-8 are played back. When the mode is active, the key

lights up.

• When viewing or editing the EQ setting, press this key.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

17. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE / FADER] key

• When storing, recalling or deleting a scene memory,

press this key.

• To view track fader positions, press this key while de

pressing the [SHIFT] key.

21. [2TRK MODE-MASTERING] key

• Turns on or off the "Mastering mode" in which tracks

7-8 are played back with sound processing (the EQ,

reverb and compressor). When the mode is active, the

key lights up.

18. [MIX PARAMETER-EFFECT / ON/OFF] key

• When selecting the internal DSP effects, adjusting the

effect send levels, selecting pre or post of the effect send,

or setting effect parameters, press this key.

22. [STATUS/SEL-MASTER] key

• Turns on or off the master channel.

• Also used to select the track for the mix parameter edit.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

23. [MASTER] fader

• Adjusts the output levels of the stereo L/R busses.

19. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE SEQ. / MAP] key

• Turns on or off the scene sequence mode.

• When editing the scene sequence map, press this key

while depressing the [SHIFT] key.

24.Track faders

• Adjusts the playback levels of the tracks 1 through 6 and

7-8.

Top panel (Recorder/Display section)

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT B

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

PITCH

LOOP

EDIT

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

47 46 4541 40 39 38

44 43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

35. [LOCATE | / MARK] key

25. [TRACK EDIT / PGM] key

• Each press of this key locates to the previous mark point.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

stores the current position in the mark map.

• When editing audio of tracks such as copy/paste, etc.,

press this key.

There are four audio editing functions.

a. copy

b. move

c. erase

d. track exchange

36. [LOCATE | / DELETE] key

• Each press of this key locates to the next mark point.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

delete the current mark point directly.

• Pressing this key while depressing the [SHIFT] key

allows you to carry out the following program-related

functions.

37. [F FWD ] key

• Pressing this key while stopped fast-forwards the

a. creating a new program

position at 30x speed.

b. selecting a program

• Pressing this key during playback moves forward the

position at 3x speed with audible cue.

c. editing a program title

d. deleting a program

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

executes the "LOCATE REC END" function (locates to the

last recording position of the current program).

26. [CURSOR

• Used to move the edit point in edit or setup mode.

] keys

38. [REWIND ] key

• Pressing this key while stopped rewinds the position at

27. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

• Displays the recorder or mixer status or parameters.

30x speed.

• Pressing this key during playback moves backward the

position at 3x speed with audible cue.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

executes the "LOCATE ABS 0" function (locates to the

beginning of the current program).

28. Contrast adjusting knob

• Adjusts the LCD contrast.

Turning the knob clockwise makes the contrast higher,

while turning it counterclockwise makes it lower.

29. [ACCESS] indicator

• Lights up while the internal hard disk drive is writing

39. [PLAY] key

• Pressing this key starts the recorder playback.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key

(or pressing this key while holding down the [RECORD]

key)startsrecordingofthearmed(RECREADY)track(s).

• Pressing this key alone during recording punches out

(releases recording).

or reading data.

Do not turn off the VF80EX power while this indicator

lights. Data recorded in the disk may be erased.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

locates to the last playback position.

30. [PHANTOM] indicator

• Lights up when the phantom power is supplied.

You can switch the phantom power on or off by the

[PHANTOM] switch on the rear panel.

40. [STOP] key

• Pressing this key during playback, recording, fast-

forward or rewinding stops the recorder running.

• Also used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings

or audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.

• Pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key while holding

down this key executes the "LOCATE REC END" or

"LOCATE ABS 0" function.

31. [EXIT/NO / EJECT] key

• Used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings or

audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.

The opposite of the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key

locates to the last playback position.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key

locates to the last recording position.

32. [ENTER/YES] key

• Used to execute SETUP menu settings or audio editing

functions such as Copy and Paste. The opposite of the

[EXIT/NO / EJECT] key.

41. [RECORD] key

33. [JOG / SHUTTLE] dial

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key (or

pressing this key while holding down the [PLAY] key)

starts recording of the armed (REC READY) track(s).

• Pressing this key alone switches the monitor of the

armed track (s) to Input monitor (the [RECORD] key

flashes).

• When the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key is illuminated, after

pressing any of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys,

rotating this dial scrubs audio digitally with no pitch

change for both forward and backward directions.

• Used to change a parameter value in the edit mode.

• Pressing this dial while holding down the [SHIFT] key

moves the position forward or backward at 1x to 64x

speed depending on the rotating direction and degree.

Pressing this key again switches the monitor back to

Repro monitor.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

locates to the last recording position.

34. [SHIFT] key

• Used to activate the second (shifted) functions of keys

and a dial. Each shifted function is labeled in a while-

line boxes on the panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

42. [WAVE FORM SCRUB / CD PLAY] key

• Pressing this key enters the scrub mode. In the scrub

mode, you can scrub audio forward or backward

digitally.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

switchestheplaybackmodebetweenHDDplaybackand

audio CD playback.

In the example below, pressing the [SETUP / F1]

key, [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key or [UNDO/REDO / F3]

key executes "RECALL", "STORE" or "DELETE" re-

spectively.

43. [VARI PITCH / EDIT] key

• Pressing this key switches between On and Off of the vari

pitch (vari-speed playback/recording) function.

When the function is active, this key is illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makes you ready to edit the pitch value via the screen.

44. [LOOP / EDIT] key

• PressingthiskeyswitchesbetweenOnandOffoftheloop

mode. When the mode is active, this key is illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makesyoureadytoedittheloopparameters(Startpoint

and End point) via the screen.

Recalling a scene

Deleting a scene

Storing a scene

TIMEBASE

SEL

SETUP

UNDO / REDO

45. [AUTO PUNCH I/O / EDIT] key

• PressingthiskeyswitchesbetweenOnandOffoftheauto

punch mode. When the mode is active, this key is

illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makes you ready to edit the auto punch parameters (In

point and Out point) via the screen.

SHIFT

46. [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key

• Pressing this key switches the time base shown on the

screen among the following.

a. ABS (absolute time):

Absolute time from 00h00m00s to 23h59m59s.

b. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock):

Bar/Beat/Clock according to the time signature and

tempo information set in the internal tempo map.

c. MTC (MIDITime Code)

MTC with or without an offset to the ABS time.

• When a key icon is shown above "F2" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

47. [SETUP / F1] key

• Pressing this key enters the setup mode for editing/

setting the initial setting parameters of recorder and

mixer.

• When a key icon is shown above "F1" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

48. [UNDO/REDO / F3] key

• Pressing this key cancels the operation for the audio

editing (Copy, Paste, etc.), auto punch in/out or

recording, and returns to the previous condition.

This is the "undo" function.

• Pressing this key again returns to the condition before

carrying out the "undo" function. This is the "redo"

function.

• When a key icon is shown above "F3" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Names and functions (VF80EX)

Rear panel

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF / DATA

OUTPUT INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

54 55

51 52 53

53. [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector

• Accepts the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to the

coaxial (S/P DIF) digital output of an external digital

device. If the external device only provides the optical

digital output, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical

converter.

49. [AC IN] connector

• Connects the supplied AC power cord. Make sure that

the voltage of your AC outlet matches the specified

voltage.

50. [POWER] switch

• Turns on or off the power of the unit.

• Connector: RCA pin jack

54. [MIDI OUTPUT] connector

• Connects to the MIDI IN connector of an external MIDI

device.

• Mainly transmits MIDI information for synchronization

such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MIDI clock with song

position pointer.

51. [PHANTOM] ON/OFF switch

• When the switch is set to ON, the phantom power is

supplied to the condenser microphone(s) connected to

the[INPUTA/BAL] and/orthe[INPUTB/BAL] connector(s).

52. [S/P DIF / DATA OUTPUT] connector

• Outputs the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to

the coaxial (S/P DIF) digital input of an external digital

device.

If the external device only provides the optical digital

input, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical converter.

• Connector: RCA pin jack

• Connector: DIN 5-pin type

55. [MIDI INPUT] connector

• Connects to the MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI

device.

• Mainly receives MIDI control information such as MMC

(MIDI Machine Control).

• Connector: DIN 5-pin type

See an appropriate section for the detailed information of

each operation or function.

Side panel

56. CD-R/RW drive

Using the CD-R/RW drive, you can also save/load song data

to/from a CD-R or CD-RW disc, or burn an original audio CD.

• After turning the power on, pressing the eject key in the

front of the drive opens the tray. To close the tray, push

the front of the tray lightly by your hand.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the hard disk storage device (VF80EX)

About the hard disk storage device

The VF80EX is complete with a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk (storage device) which is formatted in the

Master 8 mode. Therefore, there is no need to newly assemble a hard disk or to format the hard disk.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while“IDE”is flashed.

The menu to select the format type appears.

Reformatting the hard disk

The display will appear as follows, according to the

previous format type. “****” represents the name of the

drive.

This section describes how to reformat the hard disk.

The VF80EX adopts a “FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk

Management System-3)” format which is a Fostex

exclusive format. 24 additional tracks can be used in

addition to recording and playing 8-tracks of

uncompressed 44.1kHz/16 bit high quality sound.

The hard disk formatted in the “Standard” type upon

newly formatting the hard disk will show“Standard” and

“Erase”. The hard disk formatted in the “Quick” type

upon newly formatting the hard disk will show

“Standard” and “Quick”. The user can select one.

Note that, when you reformat your hard disk, you will

erase all data saved or recorded on the hard disk, as well

as all the settings made. Reformatting your hard disk

restore the VF80EX back to the default setting.

Always make a point to check that there is no data that

you need remaining on the hard disk prior to

reformatting.

Flashing

Turn ON theVF80EX.

Press the [SETUP] key.

The system will go to the SETUP mode.

The select display of the SETUP menu appears. (The

highlight indicates the menu that is currently selected.)

Flashing

The hard disk is formatted with the access time

of the unit sectors, while judging whether the

sectors are good or bad. The formatting time

tends to be longer with this type, however, the

reliability is better.

Turn the [JOG] dial to highlight the“Disk Format”menu

title, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

“IDE” indicates the current drive.

“Standard”

Therefore,itisrecommendedthatthisdefault

format type is selected under normal

conditions.

This choice is only available when a hard disk

previously formatted in the “Standard” type is

being reformatted. With this format, the

“Standard” type is maintained, while all data on

the hard disk are erased. The formatting time is

shorter than the time required to format a

“Standard” type.

“Erase”

This is a quick formatting procedure in which all

hard disk sectors are considered to be good

sectors. The formatting time is fast, however, the

procedure cannot discover bad sectors.

Therefore, itisrecommendedthatthisformattype

is only used when formatting a new hard disk that

Fostex has already confirmed to operate

normally.

“Quick”

Flashing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the hard disk storage device (VF80EX)

Selecttheformattypewiththe[CURSOR / ]key. Then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Replacing a hard disk

The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.

The user can immediately start recording with the

VF80EX. Note that the current hard disk can also be

replaced with another model for use with the VF80EX.

(However, please only use hard disks that Fostex

recommends.)

The updated information on the operation-

confirmed HD and backup media for VF80EX is

mentioned in the following Fostex international

web site.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key

is depressed.

If the “Standard” format is selected and executed, the

formatting process takes place while showing the

progress of the good sectors (Good ***MB) on the disk,

bad sectors on the disk (Bad ***MB) and remainder

(Remain ***MB).

<http: // www. fostex.co.jp/int/index.htm>

For those who are unable to check our web site,

please contact the Fostex distributor in your

territory.

Nothing can be done during the formatting process.

Please wait for a while until the process is completed.

This section describes the procedures to replace the hard

disk. However, we recommended that the customer ask

the Fostex Customer Service Department to replace the

VF80EX hard disk. Note that the product is not warranted

for any malfunctions that may occur after the customer

replaces the hard disk on their own. Also note that Fostex

will not be held liable for any accidents that may occur

during the replacement process or any hard disk

damages, if the customer decides to replace their own

hard disk on their own.

When the hard disk is successfully formatted

(formatting completed), the number of sectors and

noncontiguous sectors are shown after formatted, then

“Completed!” lights up. Formatting is completed

instantaneously if either “Erase” or “Quick” is selected

and executed.

For this reason, the “Completed!” message lights up

without showing the progress status while formatting

is taking place.

• Always turn OFF the power of the VF80EX and unplug

the power plug from the electric outlet when replacing

the hard disk.

• Always place the hard disk on a flat and stable platform

during the replacement process. Place a soft cloth

under the unit to protect the product from scratching.

Gloves are recommended to prevent any hand injuries.

• A hard disk is an extremely sensitive precision device.

Never expose the hard disk to “strong shocks”when

replacing, assembling or handling. Never leave the

hard disk by a device that generates strong magnetic

fields.

• Always set the DIP switch and Jumper of the newly

assembled hard disk to the “Cable Select”setting.

The hard disk will not operate normally if the setting

is set to “Slave”or “Master”when the hard disk is

assembled. Refer to the User’s Manual of the hard disk

for more details on the DIP switch and Jumper settings.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from

the SETUP mode.

The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning of

the program (P01) that is automatically created after

formatting the hard disk.

• Note that the connector of some hard disks may be stiff,

and thus make it difficult or impossible to insert or

connect. Never apply excessive force to insert the

connector in such case. Always make a point to gently

insert the connector. Failure to do so may result in

unexpected injuries or damage the hard disk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the hard disk storage device (VF80EX)

Unscrew the four screws from the bottom of the main

unit that are fixing the panel.

After disconnecting the cables, remove the panel that

is fixing the hard disk.

Unscrew the four screws with a screwdriver, as shown

in the Figure.

Turnoverthepanelthattheharddiskisfixedaccording

to the instructions shown in the figure below.

Note that hard disk cables will be connected.

Be careful not to apply excessive force when turning

over the panel.

Fix a new hard disk to the panel in the reverse order of

removing the hard disk as performed earlier. Connect

the cables. Then house the hard disk at the bottom of

the main unit.

Followthe<Precautions> describedearlier, andproperly

assemble the parts.

Remove the two cable connectors that are connected

to the hard disk.

Gently hold the connector and slowly pull out.

When the new hard disk is successfully assembled,

go to the next section. Now, format the unformatted

hard disk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the hard disk storage device (VF80EX)

Formatting the Hard disk

Carefully follow the instructions below to newly

format the hard disk properly.

Flashing

Turn ON theVF80EX after plugging the power cable in

the electric outlet.

The VF80EX will startup. “Unformat!” will appear on the

LCD. The menu will automatically go to the SETUP

mode.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key

is depressed.

The formatting process is started. The formatting

process will take some time.

When the formatting is successfully completed,

“Completed!” will light up on the display.

The display showing the “Disk Format” menu appears.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from

the SETUP mode.

The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning

of the program (P01) that is automatically created after

formatting the hard disk.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The drive selection display appears.

“IDE” will be flashed.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the“IDE”is flashed.

The menu to select the format type appears.

“****” represents the name of the drive.

Either the “Standard” or “Quick” format type can

be selected. However, make sure that the

“Standard” format type is selected when

formatting a newly installed hard disk.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the“Standard”is

flashed.

The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Basic Recording and Playback

This chapter describes the basics of recording and playback audio using the VF80EX.

Before carrying out recording/playback, read “About a demonstration song!”, “Connections of external

equipment”, “Preliminary knowledge” and “LCD”.

About a demonstration song!

YourVF80EXmayhaveademonstrationsongonprogram1(P01)whenshipped(notethatsomeVF80EX

units may not have a demonstration song, depending on the production). Please check whether a

demonstration song is recorded or not on your unit according the following manner.

After turning on the unit and booting up program 1, press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

• If the level meters move:

• If the level meters do not move:

A demonstration song is recorded.

Title of the recorded demonstration song will be

indicated for the program title.

No demonstration song is recorded.

Temporary title such as "#0001" will be indicated

for the program title.

If a demonstration song is recorded, you can listen to the song any time by playing back program

1 (see page 28 for details about how to play back a program).

Note that you cannot record a new material on program 1 if a demonstration song is recorded on

program 1. Therefore, before starting recording for the first time, you must carry out any of the

following operations.

Note: You can start recording without the need for carrying out any of the following operations if no

demonstration song is recorded on your unit.

If you wish to start recording while keeping the demonstration song

Create a new program.

The newly created program is not record-prohibited, so you can record a material onto it.

See page “61” for details about how to create a new program.

If you wish to record a material on program 1 (overwriting the demonstration song)

Set "Rec Protect" menu in the setup mode to "Off".

Now you can overwrite the demonstration song on program 1 by a new material.

See page “141” for details about how to make the record-protect setting to "Off".

If you wish to record a material onto program 1 after deleting the demonstration song

Delete program 1.

After deleting program 1, a new blank "program 1" is automatically created onto which you can

record a new material.

See page “62” for details about how to delete a program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Connections of external equipment

You can connect various sound sources and external devices to the input and output connectors of the

VF80EX as shown in the example below. When making connection, make sure that the [MASTER] fader

is set to the lowest (“∞”) position and the [PHONES] knob to the left most (“MIN”) position. Otherwise,

your speakers or headphones may damage by the audio noise generated when connecting cables.

Headphones

Amplifier + Speakers etc.

Microphones (Dynamic

or condenser type)

Foot switch (mode 8051)

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

<Note>

You cannot use both the [BAL] and

[UNBAL] connectors on INPUT A and

INPUTBsimultaneously. Pluggingthe

[UNBAL] connector disconnects the

[BAL] connector.

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

Top panel

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

REC EFF

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

<Note>

Do not power on the machine with non-speci-

fied foot SW connected to the foot SW jack.

When powering on the machine with non-

specified foot SW (latch type foot SW, etc.)

connected to the foot SW jack, there is a case

that the machine does not correctly boot up

with “No Drive!”alert message. In such a case,

power off the machine once, disconnect the

foot SW and then power back on.

Guitar processor

Electric guitar

Electric bass

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

Rear panel

AC outlet

Digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT etc.)

Sequencer

PC w/sequence software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Switching the time base

Each press of the [TIME BASE SEL] key cycles the time

base of the Normal screen between “ABS”, “BAR/BEAT/

CLK” and “MTC”.

LCD

This section describes major contents on the LCD

display and their operations.

Display when turning on the power

When turning on the power of the VF80EX on which

a formatted hard disk is installed, the unit starts up

and “Initial..” and “version number” appears on the LCD

display, followedby “CurrentDr”, “IDE”, “harddiskname

(momentarily)” and “record mode (Standard or

Quick)”. Then the unit gets ready at the beginning

(ABS 0) of the program which was selected when the

power was turned off last time. The current position

is shown by the time base previously selected.

The display that appears when the unit gets ready is

call “Normal screen”. The Normal screen shows the fol-

lowing items.

Normal screen with ABS time base

Normal screen with BAR/BEAT/CLK time base

Screen example while starting up

Normal screen with MTC time base

Normal screen

“Disk remain” indication

You can check the disk remaining space which shows

the “recordable space left on the current disk”.

The disk remaining space (REM) is shown during “Rec

ready” or “Recording”, in “time” when the remaining

time is less than 100 hours, or in “MB (Megabyte)” of

the remaining space when it exceeds 100 hours.

Note that the remaining time is shown as the record-

able time when you record onto a single track.

You can calculate the recordable time for recording

onto8tracksbydividingthedisplayedremainingtime

by 8.

1. Scene number & name

With the initial setting, “S00: Initial Mix” appears.

2. Program number & name

With the initial setting, “P01: #0001” (#0001 is a tentative

name) appears.

3. Mark number & name

With the initial setting, “00:ABS 0” appears, showing that the

current location is at the beginning of the program. When

the recorder starts running, “:” between the number and

name is replaced with “+”.

Remaining time displayed in time

4.Time base

With the initial setting, the ABS time base is selected.

You can change the time base by using the [TIME BASE SEL]

key (see the next section).

5. Level meters forTracks 1 through 8

Remaining time displayed in MB

6. Master level meters for the Stereo output (L, R)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Preliminary knowledge

• Inputs and tracks

You can record onto adjacent two tracks (Tracks 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, or 7-8) or a mono track (one of Tracks 1 through

6). You cannot select another combination.

The input signal from [INPUT A] is fed to odd tracks (1, 3, 5 and 7), while the input signal from [INPUT B] is fed

to even tracks (2, 4, 6 and 8). Because each input signal is directly fed to appropriate tracks, you cannot tailor

the signal when recording. However, you can add reverb or equalize the sound during mixdown, or rerecord a

track sound later with applying a distortion-type effect.

PEAK

TRACK STATUS

/ TRACK SEL

HARD DISK

TRACK 1

CH ON/OFF

BALANCE

INPUT A

TRIM

TRACK 2

TRACK 3

TRACK 4

TRACK 5

UNBALANCE

TRACK 6

TRACK 7

TRACK 8

CH ON/OFF

BALANCE

INPUT B

TRIM

PEAK

UNBALANCE

Both the balanced and unbalanced input connectors are provided for [INPUT A] and [INPUT B], allowing con-

nection of balanced and unbalanced devices. In addition, the phantom (DC 48 V) power can be supplied to

the balanced XLR inputs, so you can use condenser microphones that need the phantom power (see the fol-

lowing section about how to use condenser microphones).

<Note>:You cannot use both the balanced and unbalanced inputs simultaneously.

When plugging the unbalanced (phone) input connector, the balanced (XLR) input connector is disconnected.

• How to use condenser microphones

When connecting a condenser microphone that needs the phantom power, set the [PHANTOM] switch on the rear

panel to“ON”. Read the following notes carefully before using the phantom power.

• Be sure to keep the following notes.

* When connecting a condenser microphone to the balanced input

connectoroftheVF80EX, checkwhetherornotthemicrophoneneeds

the phantom power (+48 V).

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

* Switch the [PHANTOM] switch to ON after connecting a microphone.

* When switching the [PHANTOM] switch, or when plugging or

unplugging a microphone, mute the VF80EX output signals.

* When connecting a dynamic microphone to the balanced input

connector, set the [PHANTOM] switch to OFF. Otherwise, the

microphone may damage.

[PHANTOM]switch

•You cannot use the phantom power for following microphones.

* microphones with the unbalanced output

* high impedance microphones

* microphones with the XLR connectors that leaks a signal between

pin #2 and pin #1 or pin #3 and pin #1

* microphones with the center tapout type ground such as old-

fashioned ribbon microphones

Note that the VF80EX power must be ON when

changing the [PHANTOM] switch setting.

Also note that the [PHANTOM] switch should be

set to “OFF”after using the phantom power.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Basic recording (recording onto a single track)

At first, let’s record a single sound source onto a single track to know the basic recording procedure of the VF80EX

There are 8 recording tracks (Tracks 1 through 8) and you can record onto any desired track(s).

In the following example, we are going to record an electric guitar (with an effect unit) onto Track 1.

Before starting, set all the track faders (1 through 6 and 7-8) and the master fader to the lowest position (-∞), and

the [TRIM] knob to the left most position (LINE).

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

PITCH

LOOP

EDIT

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

7 10

Raise both the track 1 fader and master fader to“0”po-

sition.

Preparation for recording

This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of

these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound

can be monitored.

Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL jack to the output of the

effect unit whose input is connected to a guitar.

To record onto Track 1, 3, 5 or 7, use INPUT A.

<Note>:The track 1 fader can be used for adjusting

the monitor level without affecting the recording

level. To adjust the recording level, use the [TRIM]

knob of INPUT A.

Connect the [PHONES] jack to headphones for moni-

toring.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key ofTrack

The key lighting in green changes to flashing in red,

showing Track 1 is now armed. (The “Remain” time is

shown on the screen.)

Press the [RECORD] key.

The key starts flashing in red, while Track 1 (which is

armed) changes to the input monitor mode.

The [CH ON/OFF] key of INPUT A automatically lights.

In this condition, by pressing the [CH ON/OFF] key of IN-

PUT A, INPUT A can be muted.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.

After showing “PleaseWait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-

mal screen.

Use the [TRIM] knob of INPUT A while playing the gui-

tar to get proper gain.

Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the

[PEAK] indicator does not turn on when playing the

guitar at the loudest volume.

You can monitor both the input level of Track 1 and the

stereo (L & R) output level from the bar-graph meters

on the screen.

To unarm a track, press the flashing [TRACK STA-

TUS/TRACK SEL] key twice. The key changes to light

in green.

Now you have recorded a sound source onto a track.

Playback

Pressthe[REWIND]keywhileholdingdownthe[STOP]

key to locate to“ABS 0”.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

<Note>:Set the gain not to light the [PEAK] indicator

when playing the guitar at the loudest volume.

When the [PEAK] indicator lights, the input level is

too high and the sound may be distorted or digital

noise may be generated.

You can control the playback level by the track 1 fader.

If you find that the recording was not successfully made,

use the undo/redo function and try recording again.

Theplaybacklevelofeachrecordedtrackcanbecon-

trolled using the corresponding track fader.

You can mute the playback track by pressing the cor-

responding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key except

in the mix parameter edit mode.

In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob

clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-

phones.

<Warning!>: Be careful not to excessively raise the

[PHONE] volume. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds

may have an adverse effect on hearing.

Undo/Redo

After finishing a recording, pressing the [UNDO/

REDO] key returns to the condition just before re-

cording (Undo).

Recording

If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again, you can

cancel the Undo operation and return back to the

condition after recording.

Pressthe[REWIND]keywhileholdingdownthe[STOP]

key to locate to“ABS 0”.

If the current recorder position is “ABS 0”, you can skip

the operation above.

[UNDO/REDO] key

Pressthe[PLAY]keywhileholdingdownthe[RECORD]

key to start recording.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track 1 and the

[RECORD] key light on, showing the VF80EX is now re-

cording.

TIMEBASE

SETUP

UNDO REDO

SEL

SHIFT

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

VARI

PUNCH I/O

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

TheVF80EX uses the direct recording method. In this

method,a digital signal just after the A/D conversion is

directly recorded onto a track, without being routed to

extra algorithms such as EQ.

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

You can add reverb or equalize the sound during

mixdown.

In addition, the insert effect function allows rerecord-

ing a track sound with applying a distortion-type effect

later. See“using the insert effect”on page 83.

<Note>: The undo/redo function is available to any re-

cording, however, if you carry out any of the following

operations after recording, you cannot use the undo/

redo function.

Therefore, if you are not satisfied with the recording,

press the [UNDO/REDO] key immediately to undo the

recording and make recording again.

When the recorder starts running, the mark number and name

shown on the top line of the screen changes as below, showing

that the current position is ahead of “ABS 0” point.

* Making a new recording

* Making a new editing (copy, move, erase, auto punch

in/out, etc.)

* Turning off the power

* Executing program select, rename, and deleting

* Executing drive selection

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Basic recording (recording onto two tracks)

After recording onto track 1 as described in the previous section, let’s make recording of a stereo sound source

onto tracks 3 and 4.

Stereo source

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT B

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

6 9

Press the [RECORD] key.

Preparation for recording

The [RECORD] key starts flashing in red, while Tracks 3

and 4 (which are armed) changes to the input monitor

mode.

Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL and [INPUT B] UNBAL

jacks to the L and R outputs of the stereo source re-

spectively.

Use the [TRIM] knobs of INPUT A and B while playing

the stereo source to get proper gain.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys ofTracks

3 and 4.

Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the

[PEAK] indicator does not turn on.

You can monitor both the input level of Tracks 3 and 4

from the bar-graph meters on the screen.

The keys lighting in green change to flashing in red,

showing Tracks 3 and 4 are now armed. (The “Remain”

time is shown on the screen.)

The [CH ON/OFF] keys of INPUT A and B automatically

light in green.

Raise the faders of tracks 3 and 4 and [MASTER] fader

to“0”position.

This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of

these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound

can be monitored.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

<Note>: Set the gain not to light the [PEAK] indica-

tor. When the [PEAK] indicator lights, the input level

is too high and the sound may be distorted or digi-

tal noise may be generated.

Playback

Locate to the desired position (time) for playback.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

You can control track playback levels by using the cor-

responding track faders.

In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob

clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-

phones.

Ifyoufindthattherecordingwasnotsuccessfullymade,

use the undo/redo function and try recording again.

<Warning!>: Be careful not to excessively raise the

[PHONE] volume. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds

may have an adverse effect on hearing.

Theplaybacklevelofeachrecordedtrackcanbecon-

trolled using the corresponding track fader.

You can mute the playback tracks by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

except in the mix parameter edit mode.

Recording

Locate to the start position (time) for recording.

The VF80EX has 8 recordable tracks.

Pressthe[PLAY]keywhileholdingdownthe[RECORD]

key to start recording.

If you record materials onto all 8 tracks according

to the procedures described in “Basic recording”,

you cannot record further materials.

To record more materials, you can use the “track

bounce” technique to save tracks as follows:

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of Tracks 3 and 4,

as well as the [RECORD] key light on, showing the VF80

is now recording.

You can see the meter for Track 1 also moving. By rais-

ing the Track 1 fader, you can make overdubbing onto

tracks 3 and 4 while listening to playback of track 1.

1. Record materials onto tracks 1 through 6.

2. Mix the signals recorded on tracks 1 through

6andrecordthemixedsignalontotracks7and

Then tracks 1 through 6 can be used to record

other materials.

This is the basic technique used for Multitrackers.

We recommend that tracks 7 and 8 are basically

usedasthedestinationtracksof“trackbounce” from

tracks 1 through 6.

See“Advanced Operation” for details about the track

bounce technique.

When the recorder starts running, the mark number

and name shown on the top line of the screen changes

as below, showing that the current position is ahead

of “ABS 0” point.

In addition, tracks 7 and 8 play an important role

in “training mode” and “mastering mode” described

later in “Advanced functions”.

The VF80EX also provides the “track exchange”

function which allows you to keep recordable

tracks.

The VF80EX has 16 additional tracks for each pro-

gram, in addition to 8 recordable (and playable)

realtracks(1through8). The“trackexchange” func-

tion allows you to exchange a real track and an

additional track, making the real track empty.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.

After showing“PleaseWait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-

mal screen.

See page 56 “Recorder functions.”

To unarm tracks now recorded, press the flashing

[TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys again. The keys

changes to light in green.

Nowyouhaverecordedastereosourceontotwotracks

(3 and 4).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Mark function

The VF80EX has the Mark function which allows you to set marks at the desired positions in a song.

You can locate to a mark position immediately, as well as use mark positions for the punch in and out points,

beginning and end points for repeat and editing points for track editing such as copy, move, erase, etc.

This section describes how to set, delete and locate to a mark. For details about editing a mark, see “Recorder

functions” described later.

Setting a mark on the fly

Locating a mark

In the initial condition, Mark 00 is automatically en-

tered at the beginning of the current program (ABS

0) and named “ABS 0”.

You can locate to a mark using the [| ] or [ |] key.

Current position

You can enter up to 99 marks (Mark 01 through 99).

Mark number and name are shown on the Normal

screen as the arrow points in the screen example be-

low. (You cannot edit or delete Mark 00.)

[

I] key

] key

• Pressing [| ] key locates to the previous mark.

In the example above, each time you press the key from

the current position, the recorder will locate to Mark 03

-> 02 -> 01 -> 00.

• Pressing [ |] key locates to the next mark.

In the example above, each time you press the key from

the current position, the recorder will locate to Mark 04

-> 05 -> 06.

Duringplayback(orwhilestopped),press[| /MARK]

key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

“Entry Mark” is shown briefly and a mark is entered at

the current position.

Also the time marked is entered in the mark map list

(see “Recorder functions” for details).

The current (located) mark number is shown on the

Normal screen.

To enter another mark, repeat step 1) above.

<Note>

Marks are assigned in ascending order of ABS time.

For example, even if you enter marks in order as shown

in the upper diagram below, the mark numbers are as-

signed as shown in the lower diagram.

Deleting a mark

You can delete unnecessary mark

While stopped, locate to the mark to be deleted using

the [| ] or [ |] key.

The mark to be deleted is shown on the screen.

Press the [ |/DELETE] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

A pop-up panel asking for confirmation to delete the

current mark appears, in which “Sure?” blinks.

To cancel the operation for deletion, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The current mark is deleted.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

ABS locate functions

There are four types of the ABS locate functions as below.

• Pressing the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates to the beginning of the current program

(ABS 00), regardless of the time base setting.

• Pressing the [F FWD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates to the end position of the last recording of

the current program (REC END).

You can use this function to locate to the end point of a song or to check the length of a song.

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates to the beginning of the last playback.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates to the beginning of the last recording.

Punch in/out

If you are not satisfied with your recording and want to modify only a specific part, you can replace the part with

a new recording using the punch in/out technique.

“Punch in” switches the transport mode from playback to recording, while “Punch out” switches the transport

mode from recording to playback. The point at which a punch in is carried out is called a “punch in point”, while

the point at which a punch out is carried out is called a “punch out point.”

You can carry out the punch in/out operation in 3 ways:

Punch in/out using the foot switch

* Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit

* Using the foot switch (Model 8051)

* Auto punch in/out function

After setting the punch in and out points, the punch

in/out can be took place automatically.

Connect the Model 8051 foot switch to the [FOOT SW]

jack.

FOOT SW (Model 8051)

The following description is assumed that the track(s)

to be punched in/out are armed and the source input

level is set appropriately by using the [TRIM] knob.

[FOOT SW] jack

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

REC EFF

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

sition before the punch in point.

PHANTOM

<Note>

Whentheplaybackpositionreachesthepunchinpoint,

Do not power on the machine with non-specified foot

SW connected to the foot SW jack.

pressthe[RECORD]keywhileholdingdownthe[PLAY]

key.

When powering on the machine with non-specified

foot SW (latch type foot SW, etc.) connected to the

foot SW jack, there is a case that the machine does

not correctly boot up with“No Drive!”alert message.

In such a case, power off the machine once, discon-

nect the foot SW and then power back on.

Onlythearmedtrack(s)switchfromplaybacktorecord-

ing.

At the punch out point, press the [PLAY] key .

The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.

Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-

sition before the punch in point.

Whentheplaybackpositionreachesthepunchinpoint,

step on the foot switch.

Onlythearmedtrack(s)switchfromplaybacktorecord-

ing.

At the punch out point, step on the foot switch.

The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

• Setting the punch in/out points numerically

While the recorder is stopped, you can set the in and

out points by entering the time numerically.

Auto punch in/out function

You must set the punch in and out points before per-

forming auto punch in/out recording.

You can set the points either during playback and

whilestopped. Inthefollowingdescription,weassume

that the “ABS” time base is selected.

While stopped, press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

• Setting the punch in/out points on the fly during playback

(or while stopped)

Pressthe[AUTOPUNCH/EDIT]keywhileholdingdown

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

During playback, this counter shows the current

recorder position in real time.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the punch in point

value is highlighted on the screen as above.

Now you can edit the punch in point value.

Initially, the “seconds” value starts blinking, showing

that it can be edited.

At the point at which you want to set the punch in point,

press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

“In Point Stored!” appears briefly, and the point is stored

as the punch in point.

Flashing

Move the blinking value by using the [CURSOR / ]

key and enter the desired value using the [JOG] dial.

After completing editing the time value, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key.

The edited time is stored as the punch in point.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the punch out

point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Now you can edit the punch out point value.

The time (or bar/beat) stored is shown here.

Atthepointatwhichyouwanttosetthepunchoutpoint,

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

“OutPointStored!” appearsbriefly, andthepointatwhich

you carry out the operation above is stored as the punch

out point.

Flashing

Enter the desired value with the same method as en-

tering the punch in point,then press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The edited time is stored as the punch out point.

The time (or bar/beat) stored is shown here.

After storing times for both points,press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

<Note>

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Set the punch in point earlier than the punch out point.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

• Performing auto punch in/out recording

•Taking a mark point in the punch in or punch out point

After storing the punch in and out points, you can

perform the auto punch in/out recording.

You can take a mark point in the punch in or out point.

<Note>

Press the [AUTO PUNCH /EDIT] key (to illuminate the

The following operation is possible only when any marks

are stored using the Mark function described earlier.

key).

The auto punch mode is now active.

Locate to the earlier position to the punch in point.

Press the [RECORD] key while holding down the

Pressthe[AUTOPUNCH/EDIT]keywhileholdingdown

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

[PLAY] key.

A “take” of auto punch in/out recording starts and

“TAKE” lights up on the screen.

The recorder starts playback, and then automatically

puts into the record mode at the punch in point. It

automatically switches to playback at the punch out

point.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key when the in point time

In the step 3) above, if you press only the[PLAY] key,

a “rehearsal” of auto punch in/out recording starts

and “RHSL” lights up on the screen.

In the rehearsal mode, when the recorder reaches

the punch in point, only the monitor of the armed

track(s)switchesto“Inputmonitor” withoutperform-

ing actual recording.

value is highlighted (as above).

The highlighted line changes to show a mark.

You can rehearse as many times as you like before

actual recording.

Hint:

If you use the loop function together with the re-

hearsal mode, you can rehearse your playing re-

peatedly without the need of the recorder opera-

tion, allowing you to concentrate on your playing.

See “Recorder functions” for details about the loop

function.

Showing a mark.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The highlighted mark starts blinking.

Blinking

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected mark position is taken in the punch

in point.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the punch out

point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected mark position is taken in the punch out

point.

After setting both points, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Mixing

After recording all tracks (1 through 8), you can tailor the sound of each track. The following describes about

settings for level, pan, EQ and effects.

Set the pan position using the [JOG] dial.

The pan icon on the screen changes in real time accord-

Adjusting levels

Adjust the playback level of each track using the cor-

ing to the rotation of the [JOG] dial.

responding fader (1 through 6 and 7/8).

The levels of tracks 7 and 8 are simultaneously con-

trolled by a single fader (7/8).

Repeat steps 2) and 3) to set other tracks.

After completing the pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Adjust the stereo master output (ST OUT L/R) levels

using the [MASTER] fader.

Adjusting EQ

You can view the stereo master output (L/R) levels

from the L/R level meters on the screen. The output

levels are affected by the [MASTER] fader position.

Be sure not to set the fader level too high to avoid

the sound distorted.

Press the [EQ] key.

The EQ screen is shown, where “SelectTRK!” is flashing

in the initial condition.

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

Setting pan position

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

You can set the pan position of each track.

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

REC EFF

MASTERING

TRAINING

Press the [PAN] key.

The pan setting screen is shown, where “SelectTRK!” is

flashing in the initial condition.

[EQ] key

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

Flashing

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

[PAN] key

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

REC EFF

MASTERING

TRAINING

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-

sired track.

Thedefaultpresetlibraryentry(“L00:2-SHLV”)isshown,

in which the High Gain field is highlighted, showing that

it can be edited.

Flashing

highlighted

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-

sired track (or use the [CURSOR / ] keys to select

the desired track).

The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, show-

ing that it is editable.

<Selecting from the EQ library>:

There are 36 presets besides the default preset in the

EQ library. You can select a desired preset accord-

ing to the situation and tailor the sound. See “Mixer

functions” for details.

highlighted

Edit the“Hi Gain”value using the [JOG] dial.

The EQ curve is shown according to the value setting,

while the sound changes in real time.

You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Highlight the“Lo Gain”field by using the [CURSOR

]

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the send level.

While the send level changes, the corresponding icon

also changes in real time.

When the value increases, the effect sound of the cur-

rently selected effect type will be output.

key, and edit the“Lo Gain”value using the [JOG] dial.

You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB, as

same as the Hi Gain.

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to edit EQ on other tracks.

To set the effect send levels for other tracks, carry out

step 2 and 3 above repeatedly.

After completing the EQ setting, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Effect type setting

Setting effects

The VF80EX provides 38 effect types (L01 through L38) used

for the loop effect and 6 effect types (L39 through L44) used

for the insert effect.

There are two methods for using the internal effect

processor of the VF80EX: “loop effect” and “insert effect”.

The following describes how to set the send level and

select an effect type of the loop effect.

See “Mixer Function” for details about the loop effect,

such as how to make pre/post setting of an effect send

or how to set effect parameters.

Bring up the effect type setting screen and select the

desired effect type by rotating the [JOG] dial.

While rotating the [JOG] dial, the effect type appears

one after the other among 38 types (L01 ~ L38).

See also “Advanced Operations” on page 83 for details

about the insert effect.

Highlighted

Press the [EFFECT] key.

The effect send level setting screen appears initially.

Each press of the [EFFECT] key switches between the

effect send level setting screen, effect type selection

screen and effect send pre/post selection screen.

<Note>

If you select an effect type used for the insert effect

(i.e. any one of L39 through L44), the screens for

effect type selection and effect send pre/post selec-

tion are not shown.

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

[EFFECT] key

ON/OFF

After selecting the desired effect type, press the [EN-

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

REC EFF

MASTERING

TRAINING

TER/YES] key.

The selected effect type is set.

Pressthe[EFFECT]keytobringuptheeffectsendlevel

Flashing

setting screen.

Adjust the effect send levels as described above.

All the effect sends from tracks 1 through 6 are

initially set to “post-fader”. Therefore, when a track

fader is completely down, no signal is sent even if

you raise the effect send level of the track.

You can also select “pre-fader” if necessary.

See“Mixer functions” for details.

Effect send level setting

While the effect send level setting screen is shown,

press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the

desired track.

You can set parameters for the selected effect type.

See “Mixer functions” for details about parameter

setting.

The effect knob icon of the selected track is highlighted,

showingthatitcanbeedited. Thedefaultvaluefortrack

sends 1 through 6 is “0” while the default value for the

master is “80”.

highlighted

You can switch on or off the effect alternately by

pressing the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding

down the [SHIFT] key.

See “Mixer functions” for details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Recording/Playback (VF80EX)

Mixdown

After tailoring sound of all the tracks, let’s make a master tape (disc) using your master recorder (cassette, DAT,

MD, etc.). As the VF80EX can feed the stereo outputs (L and R) via the S/PDIF (coaxial) digital output jack, you

can make the master tape (disc) in digital domain if your recorder provides a digital input jack. If your digital

recorder only provides the optical input jack, use the Fostex COP-1 optical to coaxial converter.

Digital mixdown

The VF80EX provides the “mastering mode” and “internal

mastering mode”.

In the mastering mode, you can record a material mixed

down to track 7 and 8 to an external master recorder,

while applying sound processing. The mastering mode

allows you to perform advanced mastering.

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

See “Advanced Operations” on page 76 for details about the

mastering mode.

Intheinternalmasteringmode, youcancreateamastersong

inside the VF80EX, without the need of using an external

master recorder. Also, you can create an audio CD from

master materials mastered in the mastering mode. (Note

thatyouneedtheoptionalCD-RWdrivetocreateanaudio

CD.)

See “Advanced Operations” on page 79 for details about the

internal mastering mode, and “Save/load of song data” on

page 125 for details about creating an audio CD.

Digital master recorder

Connect the [DATA OUTPUT] jack to the digital input

jack of your master recorder.

Analog mixdown

Analog master recorder

Set the master recorder’s recording source to the digi-

tal input.

• ThesamplingfrequencyoftheVF80EXisfixedto44.1

kHz, so you cannot record the VF80EX digital output

signal to the master recorder that cannot accept 44.1

kHz digital signals.

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

• In general, you cannot adjust the digital input level

of a digital recorder.

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

Adjust the stereo output level of theVF80EX using the

[MASTER] fader.

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

MASTERING

BOUNCE

REC EFF

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

• In general, set the fader so that the level meter on the

master recorder indicates “0” when the VF80EX feeds

the loudest level signal.

Connect the [ST OUT - L/R] jacks to the input jacks of

your analog master recorder.

If the level is too high, the sound may be distorted.

Startrecordingthemasterrecorder,andstartplayback

of theVF80EX from the beginning of the song.

Set the recording level of the master recorder.

When recording finishes, stop both the units.

Startrecordingthemasterrecorder,andstartplayback

of theVF80EX from the beginning of the song.

When recording finishes, stop both the units.

You can fade in or fade out a song by using the [MASTER]

fader.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Mixer Functions

Initial condition when turning on the power

When turning on the power, the VF80EX starts up while showing the unit information on the LCD display and

then gets ready when the screen below appears. This screen is called "Normal Screen", in which the program

number and current recorder position are shown. In the following example (the default), Program 1 (P01) is

loaded and the current position is the beginning (ABS 00M 00S).

Normal screen

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

Lighting in green

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Lighting in orange

Operations while the Normal screen is shown

Fader

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the muted

track is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting

and lights up the key.

The fader for each track (1 through 6 and 7/8) con-

trols the level of the playback signal fed to the stereo

outputs.

Master fader mute

Track mute

While the VF80EX is not in the mix parameter edit

mode, pressing the [STATUS/SEL] key for the master

fader mutes the stereo outputs.

While the stereo outputs are muted, the [STATUS/SEL]

key is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting

and lights up the key.

While the VF80EX is not in the mix parameter edit

mode, pressing any one of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys (for tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8) mutes the

corresponding track.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Mix parameter section

The Mix parameter section provides five keys that are used for mixer function settings.

By pressing one of these keys alone or while holding down the [SHIFT] key, you can execute the following.

<Note>: The VF80EX mixer channels always receive corresponding track signals. They do not receive input

signals.

• Pan setting

MIX PARAMETER

• EQ setting

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

• Effect send level setting

• Effect send pre/post setting

• Effect type/parameter setting

• Effect on/off setting

• Save/load/delete of a scene memory

• Scene sequence mode on/off setting

• Mark map setting

FADER

MAP

PAN

EFFECT

• Fader view

ON/OFF

Adjusting pan positions

You can adjust the pan position of each track signal fed to the stereo outputs.

Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the pan position.

The pan position is set according to the rotating degree.

The following show examples of the pan settings.

Press the [PAN] key.

The pan screen appears.

If you have not edited any track parameter for pan, EQ

or effect send setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as all the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or

effect send setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

Pan position:

hard right

Pan position:

hard left

center

•Controllable tracks

Tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8

Flashing

•Available values

L10 (hard left) through C (center) to R10 (hard right)

(the default setting: "C" for all tracks)

To adjust the pan position for another track, repeat

steps 2 and 3 above.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

After completing pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80EX exits the mix parameter edit mode and the

LCD display returns to the Normal screen.

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, indi-

cating that you can edit it.

The[TRACKSTATUS/TRACKSEL] keyoftheselectedtrack

flashes.

Highlighted

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Editing EQ

The VF80EX is equipped with 2-band (HI and LO) EQ for Tracks 1 through 6.

36 preset entries are available in the EQ library.

Selectable from 36 preset library entries (L00

through L36). The default is "L00: 2-SHLV.

After selecting the desired library, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key to confirm the setting.

<Note>: You can apply EQ only to Tracks 1 through 6. You

cannot apply EQ to Tracks 7/8.

Library

Press the [EQ] key.

*See the following table for details about the EQ

library.

The EQ screen appears.

If you have not edited any track parameter for EQ, pan

or effect send setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or

effect send setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

Setting example 1: Set "Hi Gain" to "+11 dB."

Thehighfrequencygainisboostedupasshowngraphi-

cally.

Flashing

Setting example 2: Set "Lo Gain" to "-8 dB."

The low frequency gain is cut as shown graphically.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The selected track number and library entry name

(shown as "EQ-1" and "L00:2-SHLV" respectively in the

screen example below) are shown, together with the

current settings. The gain value of Hi EQ ("Hi Gain")

flashes, indicating that you can edit it.

Setting example 3: Set "EQ library" to "L03."

Thehighfrequencygainisboostedupasshowngraphi-

cally.

Flashing

By using the [JOG] dial to select "L03": Ana.Kick" and

pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, the preset parameter

values are shown together with the corresponding EQ

curve.

Use the [CURSOR

be edited.

Each time you press the [CURSOR ] key, the flashing

parameter (to be edited) changes in the following or-

der. Hi Gain -> Lo Gain -> EQ ON/OFF -> library entry

->Hi Gain...

] key to select a parameter to

You can edit parameters from this preset condition and

store the setting as a scene. Note that if you turn off

the power, the setting is cleared.

Pressing the [CURSOR ] key changes the flashing pa-

rameter in the reverse order.

Use the [JOG] dial to edit the parameter value.

The following values are available for each parameter.

-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.

Hi Gain

The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-

ing to the current values.

To edit the EQ for another track,repeat steps 2 through

-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.

The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-

ing to the current values.

Lo Gain

ON/OFF

After completing EQ editing, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80EX exits the EQ edit mode and the LCD dis-

play returns to the Normal screen.

ON or OFF of EQ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Preset entries in the EQ library

-18.0

L00: 2-SHLV

L10: Lo-Fi_Cym

Gain

Freq.

+3.0

Gain

Freq.

Removes the brightness from a

cymbal sound by cutting high fre-

quencies.

Flat setting

The first time you bring up the EQ

screen, this entry is selected.

4kHz

H-S

8kHz

H-S

400Hz

L-S

300Hz

1.6

L11: Perc.

L01: LightKick

-4.0

+7.0

6kHz

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+6.0

400Hz

L-S

-12.0

600Hz

5.0

Gain

Freq.

Creates a bright sound by empha-

sizing the attack of a conga, bongo,

etc.

Creates a light and jaunty kick

sound

100Hz

L-S

L12:Tamb.

L02:TightKick

-8.0

+10.0

5.4kHz

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+7.0

400Hz

L-S

+10.0

4kHz

8.0

Gain

Freq.

Creates a subtle sound by empha-

sizingthepresenceofatambourine,

etc.

Creates a tight and hard kick sound.

360Hz

L-S

L13: Fat_Bass

L03: Ana.Kick

+5.0

100Hz

0.1

+3.0

2.4kHz

6.3

Gain

Freq.

+5.0

550Hz

L-S

-9.0

6kHz

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Creates a fat base sound by slightly

boosting the low frequency range.

Makesananalogkicksoundboomy.

L14: Norm.Bass

L04: Snappy_SD

+5.0

190Hz

1.0

+4.0

2.4kHz

1.0

Gain

Freq.

-7.0

1kHz

L-S

+6.0

3.5kHz

2.5

Gain

Freq.

Creates a all-round bass sound.

Makes a snare sound snappier.

L15: Loud_Bass

L05: Power_SD

+4.0

120Hz

2.0

+3.0

1.3kHz

2.2

Gain

Freq.

+8.0

150Hz

4.5

+5.0

3.5kHz

2.5

Gain

Freq.

Creates a good analog bass sound

byboostingthelowfrequencyrange

and emphasizing the attack.

Createsapowerfulandheavysnare

sound.

L16: Bright_Pf

L06: Deep_SD

+4.0

5kHz

H-S

Gain -3.0

+3.0

550Hz

4.5

+4.0

4.3kHz

2.2

Gain

Freq.

Creates a bright piano sound.

Creates a heavy sound of a snare

drum with a deep body.

Freq.

340Hz

0.9

L17: Loud_Pf

L07:Talk_Tom

+5.0

-3.0

Gain

Freq.

+7.0

3.2kHz

6.3

Gain +4.0

Creates a rich piano sound by

boosting the low frequency range

which contains rich harmonics.

Creates a skinny tom-tom sound.

1.3kHz

0.9

200Hz

L-S

Freq.

100Hz

7.1

L08: Melo.Tom

L18: Power_Pf

+6.0

-12.0

1.7kHz

2.2

Gain

Freq.

-13.0

170Hz

0.7

+7.0

5.4kHz

1.1

Gain

Freq.

Creates a melodious sound.

Creates a tight and smooth sound.

Suitable for a piano solo.

100Hz

2.8

L09:W.GongTom

L19: E.Pf

-10.0

130Hz

L-S

+17.0

520Hz

7.1

+3.0

6.4kHz

1.7

Gain

Freq.

Gain +8.0

Createsasoundwhichemphasizes

the attack and distortion when hit-

ting keyboards of an electric piano.

Makes a tom-tom sound woody.

Freq.

1kHz

0.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

+3.0

L30: Male_Vo

+4.0

L20: Clean_EG

Gain +2.0

Gain -4.0

Adds a bright character to a trans-

parent and clean electric guitar

sound.

Effective for a male vocal

6.2kHz

H-S

Freq.

2kHz

0.5

6.6kHz

H-S

Freq.

100Hz

L-S

L31: Female_Vo

L21: CrunCh_EG

+4.0

Gain -5.0

-2.0

+6.0

4kHz

1.4

Gain

Freq.

Makes a moderately distorted

crunchelectricguitarsound distinc-

tive.

Effective for a female vocal

5.8kHz

H-S

Freq.

170Hz

120Hz

0.7

L32: Chorus

L22: OverDrvEG

-5.0

+5.0

10kHz

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Effective for a whole chorus part by

emphasizing the high frequency

range.

+6.0

310Hz

1.5

+7.0

1.3kHz

1.1

Gain

Freq.

Makes a mellow overdriven electric

guitar sound fatter.

120Hz

0.7

L33: SpeeCh

L23: Dist.EG

+3.0

10kHz

H-S

Gain ON

Makes a narration clear.

+4.0

3.6kHz

Gain +6.0

Makes a hardly distorted electric

guitar sound distinctive.

Freq.

180Hz

HPF

Freq.

370Hz

L-S

L34: Digi.Mix

L24: Metal_EG

+6.0

12kHz

H-S

Gain +5.0

Makes an analog open-reel or cas-

sette tape sound closer to a digital Freq.

sound.

+12.0

14kHz

H-S

Gain +3.0

Makes a high-gain metal sound dis-

tinctive.

100Hz

L-S

Freq.

230Hz

0.7

L35: AnalogMix

L25: Stroke_AG

Gain ON

Cuts the high frequency range and

provides an opposite character to

L34.

+8.0

9kHz

1.2

Gain -9.0

Suppresses a hole resonance of an

acoustic guitar and makes a code

stroke sound powerful.

8kHz

LPF

Freq.

250Hz

Freq.

100Hz

0.7

HPF

L36:Telephone

L26: Arpeg.EAG

Gain

Freq.

+3.0

9.4kHz

0.1

Gain -2.0

Emphasizes the mid range only to

provideatelephonereceiversound.

Controls the arpeggio code balance

of an electro-acoustic guitar.

5.6kHz

LPF

1.2kHz

HPF

Freq.

210Hz

L-S

L27: Arpeg.AG

Tips:

+5.0

Gain -7.0

“L-S”(Low shelving type)

This equalizer affects all frequencies below a specified

frequency when applying boost or cut.

Suppresses a hole resonance of an

acoustic guitar and makes an ar-

peggio brighter.

4.4kHz

H-S

Freq.

530Hz

7.1

“H-S” (High shelving type)

This equalizer affects all frequencies below a specified

frequency when applying boost or cut.

L28: Brass_Sec

-3.0

+4.0

5.6kHz

5.0

Gain

Freq.

Controlsthebalanceofbrassinstru-

ments (such as trumpets, trom-

bones. etc.).

100Hz

2.5

“LPF”(Low pass filter)

This filter passes frequencies below a cut-off frequency

while cuts frequencies above the frequency.

L29:W.WindSec

“HPF” (High pass filter)

This filter passes frequencies below a cut-off frequency

while cuts frequencies above the frequency.

+4.0

260Hz

2.2

Gain +3.0

Makes the mid frequency range of

woodwind instruments (such as

clarinets, oboe, etc.) richer.

Freq.

125Hz

L-S

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Setting Effects

The VF80EX provides 38 digital effect types used for the loop effect and 6 types used for the insert

effect. As you can select any type and adjust parameter settings for each type, comprehensive effect

processing is possible.

Employing the Fostex A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology*), the internal DSP multi-

effect processor realizes superb ambience effects. In addition, the newly developed "A.S.P. +" achieves

simulations of microphones/amplifiers with overwhelming reality.

Using a loop effect you can process sound recorded on tracks during track bouncing (ping-pong) or mixdown.

The processed sound is recorded to the other track(s) of the unit or external master recorder.

Using an insert effect, you can process sound on any of tracks 1 through 6 using a distortion or simulation

effect, and rerecord the processed sound to the same track.

* A. S. P. (Fostex Advanced Signal ProcessingTechnology)

The A. S. P. is an exclusive new digital effect processing technology designed by Fostex.

This method extracts maximum efficiency from the limited DSP power.

It achieves an overwhelmingly high density Early Reflection sound and wonderfully smooth

High Dump response through the H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm). Also, it car-

ries out an elaborate reverb simulation with clear sounds through the H. D. L. P. (Hi-

Density Logarithmic Processing), which eliminates the mutual interference between the

numerous integrated delay modules and reduce the impurity and girt of the sound.

* H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm)

There is one of indispensable elements in the natural echo called “Early Reflection Sound,” which is usually

sacrificed in commercial reverb products in order to reduce costs. (In practice, the Early Reflection Sound

means the very first reverberated sound that bounces back from walls, floors and ceilings of concert halls).

The entire reverb sound quality depends on this Early Reflection Sound and how closely it can resemble the

real echo. The H. F. A. is an algorithm that enables the effect unit to reproduce a clear and natural Early

Reflection Sound by applying an ideal harmonic feedback to each delay module.

* H. D. L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing)

The reverb sounds consist of lots of small delay elements combined in a complex way, which are produced

by many delay modules inside the effect unit. In order to obtain smooth and comfortable reverb sounds,

it is very important to efficiently organize the relationship between each delay module and minimize

negative mutual interference. The H. D. L. P. is a technology which applies efficient logarithmic processing

to each delay module, so that they can work in the most efficient way in order to eliminate harmful reverb

elements and roughness. This makes it possible to establish high density and transparent sounds.

About "A.S.P.+"

Combining the ambience effect technology established through the development of "A.P.S."with acoustic

theories accumulated through the development of transducers such as monitor speakers for many years,

Fostex developed a unique simulation algorithm engine called "A.S.P.+", which performs overwhelmingly

realistic microphone/amplifier simulation.

To simulate a microphone, the frequency response of the microphone, which is the most essential factor

that decides the sound character of each famous/popular microphone, must be reproduced correctly. To

get this, "A.P.S.+" carries out a double accuracy operation for each frequency range using the unique "D.A.O."

(Double Accuracy Operation).

Regarding a guitar amplifier, the peak and dip of the specific frequencies, as well as feedback of the peak

frequency'sharmonics, arethemostessentialfactorsthatdecidethesoundcharacterofeachfamous/popular

amplifier. To simulate such a unique character, "A.P.S.+" carries out a double accuracy operation for each

frequency range using the "D.A.O." (Double Accuracy Operation) to simulate the frequency curve, as well

as carries out harmonics feedback processing using the "H.F.A." (Harmonics Feedback Algorithm).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Before describing detail for the VF80EX effect setting, we briefly explain each effect type (reverb, delay,

chorus, flanger, distortion and simulator).

Reverb:

Chorus:

The so called Reverb effect consists of various reflection

sounds mixed together. For example, when you clap your

hands in a tunnel, you will hear the sound linger even

after you stop clapping your hands. This is the Reverb.

The sounds we normally hear in daily life have three types

of sounds mixed together, i.e., “Direct sound,” “Early Re-

flection sound” and “Late Reflection sound.”

The Direct sound means the sound directly reaches the

ears from the sound source. The Early Reflection sound

means the sound that comes after the Direct sound and

has rebound off the wall of the tunnel up to a few times.

The Late Reflection sound means that the sound rebounds

many times long after the Direct sound has disappeared.

Our ears normally hear the “Direct sound” - “Early Reflec-

tion sound” - “Late Reflection sound” in the order.

This makes the one original sound appear to have many

sources. The Chorus is used to widen or thicken the origi-

nal sound.

Flanger:

The Flanger is one of applications of the Delay.

This is used to create a sound like a jet airplane ascending

or descending.

Distortion:

The distortion effect distorts the sound and adds harmon-

ics. Fourtypesofthedistortioneffectareprovided:theguitar

distortion, bass distortion, drum distortion and voice dis-

tortion. The distortion is used for the insert effect.

Simulation:

Delay:

Simulators for famous guitar amplifiers and microphones

are provided. You can get a familiar distortion sound of a

famous guitar amplifier or a popular microphone sound. A

simulator can be used for the insert effect.

This is the effect to added a delayed sound to the original

sound. You can obtain a richer sound or completely change

the original source sound by using the Delay.

How to make the loop effect setting

There are two methods for using the internal effect processor of the VF80EX; "loop effect" and "insert

effect".

The loop effect allows you to apply a desired effect to track signals during track bounce (ping-pong)

operation to the other tracks or mixdown operation to an external master recorder.

The insert effect is applied when rerecording any of recorded tracks 1 through 6.

The following describes how to make settings for the loop effect. See "Advanced Operations" on page

84 for details about the insert effect.

<Note>

The effect settings described here are only available to Tracks 1 through 6.

On Track 7/8, the dedicated "Mastering processing" is built in and you can apply the reverb, compressor, etc. while trans-

ferring audio on the master tracks (7/8) to an external recorder. See "Advanced Operations" for details.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect

ASP

Effect

Master Recorder

Mixing down tracks 1 through 6 and recording to an external

master recorder.

Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7 and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Setting effect send levels

<Hint>

Wheneditingtheloopeffectsetting, pressingthe

[EFFECT] key after turning on the power cycles

the screen between "Effect send level setting

screen", "Effect type/parameter setting screen" and

"Effect send pre/post setting screen", as shown

right.

You can set send levels from Tracks 1 through 6 to the

internal A.S.P. effect processor.

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the send level

setting screen.

If you have not edited any track parameter for effect

send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,

EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

<Note>

If you select one of effect types L39 through

L44, the "Effect type/parameter setting

screen" is shown and pressing the [EFFECT]

key does not change the screen.

This is because effect types L39 through L44

areonlyusedasinserteffectsanddonothave

the "Effect send level setting screen" and

"Effect send pre/post setting screen"

See "Advanced Operations" on page 84 for

details about the insert effect.

Flashing

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

Effect send level setting screen

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The icon of the selected track is highlighted, indicat-

ing that you can edit it.

In the default settings, the send levels for Tracks 1

through 6 are "00" while the level for Master is "80."

Effect type/parameter setting screen

Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the send level value.

The knob icon also rotates according to the level value.

Whenthelevelissetto"00", nosignalissenttotheeffect

processor.

Effect send pre/post setting screen

• Editable tracks:

• Level range:

• Default level:

Tracks 1 through 6

00 through 99 in 1 step

Tracks 1 through 6: 00, Master: 80

To edit the send level for another track, repeat steps 2

and 3 above.

To edit the effect send master level, press the [STA-

TUS/SEL] key of the master to highlight the master

level icon,and then use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.

The default level value is "80."

After completing send level settings, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

The LCD display returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Selecting an effect type

Selecting Pre/Post of the effect send

You can select the send signals from Tracks 1 through

6 pre- or post- fader.

When selecting Post, a signal after the track fader is

sent to the effect processor. So if you set the fader

completely down, no signal is sent to the effect pro-

cessor.

When selecting Pre, a signal before the track fader is

sent to the effect processor. So even if you set the fader

completely down, the signal is sent to the effect pro-

cessor.

<Note>

Changing the effect preset may mute the sound mo-

mentarily!

Effect presets of the internal effect processor shown

above are classified into three types; ambience/de-

lay type (No. 1 through 28), modulation/pitch type

(No. 29 through 36), pitch type (No. 37 and 38) and

distortion/simulation type (No. 39 through 44).

If you switch the effect preset between the three types

above, the audio is momentarily muted.

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the pre/post set-

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the effect type/

ting screen.

parameter setting screen.

If you have not edited any track parameter for effect

send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes,as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,

EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,

the switch icon for the previously edited track is high-

lighted, showing that it can be edited.

Thefirsttimeyoubringupthescreen, "L01:NormHALL"

is selected as the effect type.

From the second time on when bringing up the screen,

the previously selected effect type is selected.

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired effect type.

For the loop effect, you can select among L01 through

L38.

Effect types L39 through L44 are used for the insert

effect (described later).

When you select a type other than the current type, the

type flashes.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The switch icon of the selected track is highlighted,

indicating that you can edit it.

In the default settings, all Tracks 1 through 6 are set to

"Post."

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the effect

type.

Now you can edit the first parameter.

Intheexamplebelow, the"EffLevel"valueishighlighted

showing that it can be edited.

Edit point

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Pre" or "Post."

The icon changes according to the selection as below.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a value for the highlighted

parameter.

See "Effect parameter details" about the available pa-

rameter values.

Pre fader signal is sent to the effect processor.

To set a value for another parameter,use the [CURSOR

Post fader signal is sent to the effect processor.

] key to select a parameter to be edited,and then use

the [JOG] dial to select a value.

• Selectable tracks:Tracks 1 through 6

• Setting values: PRE or POST (the default is POST).

After completing the settings,press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80EX exits the edit mode and the LCD display

returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Turning the effect processor on or off

You can select the on or off of the effect processor.

• To turn on the effect processor

Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.

The effect processor is turned on and you can hear "wet"

sound.

• To turn off the effect processor

Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.

The effect processor is turned off and you can hear "dry"

sound.

You can also see the on/off status of the effect proces-

sor in the effect type/parameter setting screen.

This icon shows the on/off status of the effect processor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

About the effect types

Effect types L01 through L38 are used for the loop effect, while L39 through L44 are used for the insert effect.

Name

Parameter type

REVERB

Explanation

L01 Norm HALL

L02 Pres HALL

L03 Wet HALL

L04 NoER HALL

L05 Lo-F HALL

L06 STADIUM

Standard hall reverb; detailed and transparent, with a moderate amount of early reflections.

Hall reverb with presence and definition.

Hall reverb with restrained high-frequency and a refreshing atmosphere.

All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and even decay of all frequencies.

Hall reverb with lingering low-frequency reverberation.

Stadium reverb characterized by long early reflections.

L07 AUDITRIUM

L08 HALL WAY

L09 Norm ROOM

L10 Dead ROOM

L11 Pres ROOM

L12 DrumBOOTH

L13 GARAGE

Reverb simulating an auditorium with suppressed reverberation.

Reverb with a long pre-delay, creating the impression of an extended space.

Room reverb simulating a moderate space with some sparkle.

Room reverb simulating a narrow and dead room. Adding a slight amount will give warmth to the sound.

All-purpose room reverb, with good definition and few early reflections.

Room reverb simulating a drum booth.

Room reverb simulating a narrow and live space like a garage, with crisp presence.

Modern-sounding plate reverb with wide bandwidth.

L14 NormPLATE

L15 Old PLATE

L16 PresPLATE

L17 Wet PLATE

L18 DigiPLATE

L19 NormVOCAL

L20 PresVOCAL

Standard plate reverb with the character of older plate units.

Plate reverb with good definition and extended high-frequencies.

Plate reverb with a gentle character.

Plate reverb that emphasizes a digital character, with metallic early reflections.

All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and uniform decay at all frequencies.

Short reverberation with extended high frequency is added to the early reflections of an ideal vocal booth. Since

this adds sparkle to the sound, it is effective when you wish to bring the vocal to the forefront.

L21 SoloVOCAL

L22 Arena VOC

L23 Arena CHO

REVERB

Plate-like reverb is added to a spacious short delay. This blends well with any genre of music.

Gentle reverb is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections.

Short reverb with extended high frequency is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections. Effective on

chorus parts.

L24 KARAOKE

L25 MnDL-HALL

L26 MnDL-PLT

L27 PnDL-HALL

L28 PnDL-PLT

L29 MonoDELAY

L30 PanDELAY

L31 MonoBpmDL

L32 PanBpmDL

L33 Short DL

REVERB

All-purpose reverb (karaoke style) that makes any vocal sound professional.

A combined effect of mono delay and hall reverb.

DLY+REVERB

DELAY

A combined effect of mono delay and plate reverb.

A combined effect of panning delay and hall reverb.

A combined effect of panning delay and plate reverb.

Mono delay

DELAY

Panning delay

BPM DELAY

SHORT DELAY

DOUBLING

CHORUS

Mono delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.

Panning delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.

Short delay that allows you to set the delay time precisely.

Doubling that allows you to set separate delay times for L and R.

Produces a chorus effect. A doubling effect can also be added.

Produces a flanging effect.

L34 DOUBLING

L35 CHORUS

L36 FLANGE

FLANGE

L37 MonoPITCH

L38 DlyPITCH

L39 Dist Gtr

MONO PITCH

DELAY PITCH

DISTORTION

SIMULATION

Pitch shift adjustable in a +/-2 octave range.

Pitch shift with a feedback delay, allowing strange effects to be produced.

Distortion sound for a guitar. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

Distortion sound for a bass. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

Distortion sound for drums. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

Distortion sound for a voice. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

You can simulates popular guitar amplifier sounds. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

You can simulates famous microphone sounds. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 84.)

L40 Dist Bass

L41 Dist Drum

L42 Dist Voice

L43 Gtr Amp Sim

L44 Mic Sim

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Effect parameter details

The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the parameter type.

The following describes parameters for effect types L01 through L38 used for the loop effect.

See "Advanced Operations" on page 84 for details about parameters for effect types L39 through L44 used for

the insert effect.

Reverb effect parameters (parameter type: REVERB)

For effect types 1--24 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Rev Time

3. Pre Delay

4. Hi Ratio

5. E/R Level

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds

Adjust the time from the original sound until reverberation begins. Range: 0--100 ms

Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

Adjust the volume of the early reflections. Range: 0--99

Delay+reverb effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY+REVERB)

For effect types 25--28 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Delay Time

3. Feedback

4. Delay Bal

5. Rev Time

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the delay time: Range: 1--230 ms

Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

Adjust the delay balance. Range: 0--99

Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds

Delay effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY)

For effect types 29 and 30 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Delay Time

3. Feedback

4. Hi Ratio

5. Filter

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the delay time. Range: 1--680 ms

Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

BPM delay effect parameters (parameter type: BPM DELAY)

For effect types 31 and 32 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. BPM

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the BPM. Range: 30--250 bpm

If the delay time exceeds 680 ms, "!" is shown.

Select the note value for the delay. Range: 24, 16, 8T, 16...8, 4T, 8., 4, 2T, 4., 2, 2., 1

3. Note

24 = 16th note sextuplets, 16 = 16th notes, 8T = 8th note triplets, 16. = dotted sixteenth notes,

8 = 8th notes, 4T = quarter note triplets, 8. = dotted eighth notes,

4 = quarter notes, 2T = half-note triplets, 4. = dotted quarter notes, 2 = half notes

* The "." shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a dotted note.

* The "T" shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a triplet.

Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99 (100 steps in increments of 1)

Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

4. Feedback

5. Filter

L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Short delay effect parameters (parameter type: SHORT DELAY)

For effect type 33 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Delay Time

3. Feedback

4. Hi Ratio

5. Filter

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the delay time. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms

Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Doubling effect parameters (parameter type: DOUBLING)

For effect type 34 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Lch Delay

3. Rch Delay

4. Filter

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the delay time of the L channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms

Adjust the delay time of the R channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99ms, 100--200 ms

Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Chorus effect parameters (parameter type: CHORUS)

For effect type 35 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Depth

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the chorus depth. Range: 0--99

3. Double Time

4. Double Lvl

5. Filter

Adjust the time difference of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99

Adjust the volume of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99

Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

* L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

* H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Flanger effect parameters (parameter type: FLANGE)

For effect type 36 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Rate

3. Depth

4. Mod Delay

5. Feedback

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the speed of modulation. Range: 0.01--2.00 Hz

Adjust the depth of modulation. Range: 0--99

Adjust the modulation delay. Range: 0--200

Adjust the number of modulation repeats. Range: 0--99

Mono pitch effect parameters (parameter type: MONO PITCH)

For effect type 37 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Pitch

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24

+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.

Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50

+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.

Select the processing method. Range: 1--3

3. Adjust

4. Mode

Delay pitch effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY PITCH)

For effect type 38 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level

2. Pitct

Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24

+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.

Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50

+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.

3. Adjust

4. Delay Time

5. Feedback

Adjust the delay time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard. Range: 0--500 ms

Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Scene memory

The VF80EX provides 100 Scene memories (S00 to S99) for each program. You can store a set of desired param-

eter settings to each memory. Items to be stored include all parameters set by mix parameter editing functions,

as well as all track fader levels. In addition to 100 Scene memories, the VF80EX also provides 10 Temporary memo-

ries(T00toT09)thatcanbeusedwithallprogramsincommon. NotethatallsettingsstoredinTemporarymemories

disappear when turning off the power.

You can give a desired title (name) with up to 16 alphanumeric or symbolic characters to each Scene/Temporary

memory. (Note that up to 11 characters can be shown on the display.)

Enter the desired scene name by using the [JOG] dial

for selecting a character and using the [CURSOR / ]

Storing the current scene

keys for moving the editing (flashing) point.

You can specify a scene name with up to 16 alphanu-

meric or symbolic characters and can see up to 14 char-

acters on the display. The following characters can be

entered:

You can store the current scene (settings) to a Scene

or Temporary memory by using the following proce-

dure.

<Hint>

Scene memories (shown as S00 through S99 on the list)

are retained even if the power is turned off, while Tem-

porary memories (shown as T00 through T09 on the list)

disappear when the power is turned off, though they do

not disappear when changing the program.

If you want to store a Temporary memory to a Scene

memory (S00 to S99), recall the temporary number be-

fore turning off the power and store the settings to the

desired Scene memory number.

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, + - * / # & ! ? ( ) [ ] < > : . , etc.

After completing the scene name entry, press the

[TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display changes to the Normal display of the pro-

gram whose scene name has just been set.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the desired

scene number.

Recalling a scene

You can recall the settings stored in Scene or Tempo-

rary memories.

• If the "Fader recall On/Off setting" menu described

later is set to "OFF", when recalling a desired scene

memory, fader settings are not recalled, while "Scene

Recalled Fader RCL OFF" is momentarily shown on the

screen.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number

to which you want to store the current settings, and

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key. (In the following example, "S01" is

• If the "Fader recall On/Off setting" menu is set to "ON",

regardless of the current physical positions of track

and master faders, the audio is output at the fader

positions when they were stored. We suggest you to

turn the monitor volume down when recalling a scene

memory to prevent an accidentally accessing high-

volume sound.

selected.)

The scene name of the program which you worked with

before entering the scene memory mode is duplicated

to the name of the selected scene number, whose

leftmost character flashes, showing that it can be ed-

ited.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the scene

number.

Flashing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number

to be recalled.

Fader adjust

After recalling a scene, the recalled fader level usu-

ally does not match the current physical fader posi-

tion, you can move the physical faders to match the

current fader positions of the scene.

The following description is assumed that "Fader re-

call setting" of the setup mode is set to "Trk & Mst."

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The selected scene is recalled and the display changes

to the Normal display.

Deleting a scene

Press the [SCENE/FADER] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

You can delete an unnecessary Scene or Temporary

memory by using the following procedure.

The display shows the fader setting screen.

The fader icon changes according to the relation be-

tween the physical fader position and recalled fader

position, as show below.

<Notes>

• You cannot delete the memory in scene number 00.

If you select scene number 00 and try to delete the

memory, "DELETE" does not appear on the display.

• You cannot undo deleting a scene.

Be sure not to select a wrong scene number to be

deleted.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the scene number/title list.

•The current physical fader po-

sition is lower than the recalled

position.

Select a memory to be deleted using the [JOG] dial.

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

Themessageaskingforconfirmationtodeletethescene

appears and "Sure?" flashes.

•The current physical fader po-

sition matches the recalled po-

sition.

•The current physical fader po-

sition is higher than the recalled

position.

To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key

now.

Move a physical fader manually to match the recalled

(scene memory) position.

Flashing

After adjusting all the fader positions, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

<Note>

If you recall a scene when "Fader recall setting" of the

setup mode is set to "OFF", the current physical fader

positions are valid.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The selected memory is deleted and the scene name

changes to "[Un-defined]", showing that no memory is

stored.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Scene sequence

Using the scene sequence function, you can recall desired scene memories at the desired mark positions during

playback. For example, you can recall scene memory 02 at "Bar 17/Beat 1" and scene memory 04 at "Bar 25/Beat

1", etc. To execute the scene sequence function, you must first assign scene (or temporary) memories to marks

in the mark map. If you set the timebase to Bar/Beat/Clk, you can assign scene memories to be recalled to the

musical positions (Bar/Beat/Clk numbers). Of course, you may set the timebase to ABS.

Highlight "Non" using the [CURSOR / ] keys, and

then select the desired scene number to be assigned

to the mark using the [JOG] dial.

<Note>

You must store data to scene memories before assigning

to the mark map.

When selecting a scene number which holds data, its

scene title is also shown below the scene number.

Assigning scene memories to the mark map

In the following description, we assume that the

timebase is set to Bar/Beat/Clk.

While theVF80EX is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ/

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows the mark map, in which the current

marks are listed.

In the mark map example below, only scene memory 00

is assigned to mark 00. ("Non" means that no memory is

assigned to the corresponding mark.)

Mark title

Scene number

<Hint>

Scene title

You can view mark titles instead of mark positions

(in bar/beat/clock base or ABS time base) in the mark

map. Pressing the [TIME BASE SEL] key while the mark

map screen is shown switches mark positions and

mark titles.

After selecting the scene number, press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

Repeat steps 1 through 4 to assign scene numbers to

other marks.

In the example below, several scene numbers are as-

signed to marks and you are ready for executing the

scene sequence function described later.

Select the desired mark using the [JOG] dial, and then

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the selected

mark.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key after assigning all desired

scenes to marks.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions (VF80EX)

Deleting a mark from the mark map

Executing the scene sequence

You can delete an unnecessary mark from the mark

map.

If you start playback while the scene sequence func-

tion is active (ON), the scenes will be recalled accord-

ing to the mark map.

<Note>

You cannot delete mark 00.

<Note>

When executing the scene sequence, the fader positions

may be recalled or not according to the fader recall mode

setting in the setup mode (the default is "OFF").

For example, if you set the fader recall mode to "ON", both

the track and master faders are automatically recalled

every time the current scene changes.

On the contrary, if you set the fader recall mode to "OFF"

(the default mode), fader positions are not recalled so you

can manually control fader positions as you like.

We suggest you to make sure to set the fader recall mode

suitably for your work before executing the scene se-

quence. See "Fader recall mode setting" on page 133 for de-

tails.

While theVF80EX is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ/

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows the mark map.

Highlight the desired mark using the [JOG] dial.

Pressthe[UNDO/REDO/F3]keywhileholdingdownthe

[SHIFT] key.

The message asking for confirmation to delete the mark

appears and "Sure?" flashes.

To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key

now.

The following show the screen appearances during play-

back with the mark map in which scene number 02 (with

the title "BBBB") is assigned to "Bar 12, Beat 1" and scene

number 06 (with the title "CCCC") is assigned to "Bar 20,

Beat 4."

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The map is deleted and the following marks are renum-

bered.

Scene sequence on/off selection

You can turn on or off the scene sequence function

for selecting whether or not performing the scene

sequence function using the mark map.

The unit starts playback from "Bar -2, Beat 1" with

the settings stored in scene number 00 (Init Mix).

While theVF80EX is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ]

key.

The [SCENE SEQ] key lights in green, showing that the

scene sequence function is active (ON).

Theunitrecallsscenenumber02(BBBB)at"Bar

12, Beat 1" and continues playback.

Each time you press the [SCENE SEQ] key, ON and OFF

alternates.

When turning on the scene sequence function, "SCENE

SQ:ON"appearsmomentarilyontheNormalscreenand

then the scene number is highlighted.

The unit recalls scene number 06 (CCCC) at

"Bar 20, Beat 4" and continues playback.

When turning off the scene sequence function, "SCENE

SQ: OFF" appears momentarily on the Normal screen

and then the highlighted scene number returns to the

Normal screen.

<Note>

The effect preset may not be changed while the

scene sequence function is active!

Effect presets of the internal effect processor are clas-

sified into three types; ambience/delay type (No. 1

through 28), modulation/pitch type (No. 29 through

36), pitch type (No. 37 and 38) and distortion/simu-

lation type (No. 39 through 44).

Note that the scene sequence function does not re-

call an effect preset whose type is different from the

current one. This is to avoid momentary audio mut-

ing, and is not a malfunction. The other mix param-

eters of the scene can be recalled even if it includes

an effect preset whose type is different from the cur-

rent one.

Highlighted

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Recorder Functions

This chapter describes various recorder functions.

Cueing

The cueing function allows you to monitor audio at higher or lower speed.

• Rotating the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial clockwise moves the

Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys

position to the forward direction, while rotating the dial

counter-clockwise moves the position to the backward

direction.

By pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during play-

back, you can monitor (cue) the sound at 3 times the

normal speed.

• According to the rotating degree, the cueing speed varies

among 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x, and 64x.

The current cueing speed is shown on the screen.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

• As long as holding down the [SHIFT] key, shuttle cueing

continues even if you release the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial.

Press the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during playback.

TheVF80EX is "cueing" in the forward direction at 64x the normal speed.

TheVF80EX is "cueing" in the backward direction at 64x the normal speed.

TheVF80EX is still.

The VF80EX starts "cueing" at 3 times the normal speed,

while "FWD" or "RWD" appears on the screen.

TheVF80EX is "cueing" in the forward direction.

TheVF80EX is "cueing" in the backward direction.

To return to the normal playback,press the [PLAY] key.

Shuttle cueing

<Remember!>

Once the data is rewound to the beginning of a pro-

gram (ABS 0), playback starts from the beginning of

the program, regardless of pressing the [SHIFT] key.

When reaching the end of a program (ABS: 23h 59m

59s), the program stops and the [PLAY] hey flashes.

During playback, "shuttle cueing" is possible at the

speed between 1 and 64 times the normal speed.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

Rotatethe[JOG/SHUTTLE]dialwhileholdingdownthe

[SHIFT] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Digital scrubbing

Storing the digital scrub point

You can store the scrub point to the Start, End or To

point for track editing functions (such as Copy, Move,

Paste and Erase), or the auto-punch in point.

Digital scrubbing can be done between 0x and 1x

speed without changing the pitch while the VF80EX

is stopped.

You can scrub audio track by track. The level enve-

lope of the scrub track is shown on the screen, allow-

ing you to locate the beginning of a song or interval

of songs easily.

• To store the scrub point to the Start point:

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT]

key.

"Edit Start Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the

scrub point is stored to the Start point for track editing.

Furthermore, you can use the position located by

digital scrubbing as an edit point for the track editing

or auto-punch in/out.

Performing digital scrubbing

While stopped, press the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key.

The VF80EX enters the scrub mode, and the display

shows the screen below.

• To store the scrub point to the End point:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

"Edit End Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub

point is stored to the End point for track editing.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the

track you are going to scrub.

The level envelope of audio recorded on the selected

track is shown. When the VF80 is stopped, "<STILL>" is

also shown.

• To store the scrub point to theTo point:

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

"EditTo Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub

point is stored to the To point, which can be used as the

starting point of Paste or the auto-punch In point.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can scrub audio of the

selected track.

The vertical line in the center shows the current posi-

tion, and you can hear scrubbing audio from this posi-

tion to either the forward or backward direction.

When rotating the [JOG] dial clockwise, "Scrub >" is

shown. When rotating the [JOG] dial counter-clockwise,

"< Scrub" is shown.

The cursor (the vertical line) moves while scrubbing,

while the time value (or bar/beat) of the current posi-

tion is shown in realtime.

• After storing the point, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen that was shown

when finishing scrubbing.

<Hint>

• You can also store the point by pressing the [ENTER/

YES] key after highlighting START , END or TO by

using the [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.

• By pressing the [| / MARK] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key, you can store the scrub point to a mark

memory.

current scrubbing position

If you want to scrub another track, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Vari Pitch

You can alter the playback or recording speed of the recorder within +/- 6.0 % range in 0.1 % increments/dec-

rements by using the vari pitch function. With the vari pitch function, the pitch changes according to the speed.

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

MUTE

PLAY

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

SEL

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

PITCH

LOOP

EDIT

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

"ON" or "OFF" (of the vari pitch function) is also shown

on the screen.

Turning on or off the vari pitch function

Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key.

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the pitch value.

The key lights up in green, showing the vari pitch func-

tion is active.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal screen.

Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key again.

The key turns off, showing the vari pitch function is not

active.

<Notes>

• Even if the pitch value is set to 0.0 % (no speed

change), pressing the [VARI PITCH] key turns on the

vari pitch function.

In such a condition, the function is active but the

speed is not changed.

<Note>

You can turn on or off the vari pitch function while

stopped or during playback, however, you cannot turn

on or off the function during recording.

Setting the speed

• The vari pitch function automatically turns off by

carrying out any of the following.

You can adjust the speed while stopped or during

playback, however, you cannot adjust the speed dur-

ing recording. If you adjust the speed during play-

backwiththevaripitchfunctionactive, youcanmoni-

tor the result of speed (pitch) change while adjusting.

1.Turning the power off and then on. (The pitch

value is also reset to 0.0 %.)

2.Setting the slave mode to "On" in the setup mode.

(The pitch value is retained.)

Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch

function when the slave mode is "On".

While stopped or during playback, press the [VARI

PITCH/EDIT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The current pitch value is highlighted, showing that the

value can be edited.

3.Setting the digital input to "On" in the setup mode

("DIGI IN" is shown on the screen).

Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch

function when the digital input is selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Loop Function

Using the loop function, you can repeat the desired part between the Start and End points.

By using the loop function together with the punch in/out or training mode, you can concentrate on playing

without the need for operating the VF80EX.

Current time (or musical position)

START point

END point

Playback

After locating the Start point, playback starts automatically.

The Start point is set to the captured time (or musical

position), which is shown here.

At the point where you want to set the End point,press

the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

When the playback position reaches the End point,

the recorder locates to the Start point automatically.

[SHIFT] key.

"End Point Stored!" briefly appears and the End point is

set to the captured point.

Current time (or musical position)

Setting the Start and End points

TherearefollowingthreemethodsforsettingtheStart

and End points.

1. Capturing the current position "On-the-fly"

2. Editing the time (or musical position) via the screen

3. Setting by marks

The End point is set to the captured time (or musical po-

sition), which is shown here.

Capturing the current position "on-the-fly"

<Note>

The Start point must be earlier than the End point.

Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.

While stopped or running, you can set the Start or End

point at the point you capture.

Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

Editing the position via the screen

In the following description, the recorder is assumed

to be stopped and the ABS time base is selected.

Current time (or musical position)

Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

At the point where you want to set the Start point,press

the[SETUP/F1]keywhileholdingdownthe[SHIFT]key.

"Start Point Stored!" briefly appears and the Start point

is set to the captured point.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

ToedittheStartpoint,pressthe[ENTER/YES]keywhile

"Start Point" value is highlighted.

The "seconds" value flashes, showing that it can be ed-

ited.

A mark is shown.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The mark shown on the Start point value field starts

flashing.

The "seconds" value flashes.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing value,

and use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.

Youcanalsousethe[CURSOR

] keystoeditthevalue.

Flashing

After editing all values, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display returns to the similar screen shown in step

1 above, in which the Start point is set to the edited time.

To edit the End point,use the [CURSOR ] key to high-

light the "End point" value and carry out the same

operations as steps 2 through 4 above.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The Start point is set to the selected mark, while the

display returns to the similar screen shown in step 2

above.

<Note>

To edit the End point,use the [CURSOR ] key to high-

light the "End point" value and carry out the same

operations as steps 3 through 4 above.

As also noted in "capturing the current position on-the-

fly", the Start point must be earlier than the End point.

Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.

The selected mark is set to the End point.

<Hint>

When rehearsing the auto punch in/out, if you also

activate the loop function in which the Start point is

set to a point a little bit earlier than the In point while

the End point is set to a point a little bit later than the

Out point, you can rehearse the auto punch in/out

repeatedly as many times as you like.

Setting the Start and End points by marks

You can set the Start and End points by marks.

Theloopfunctionisalsousefulwhenyoumakeaprac-

tice using the training mode.

<Note>

This method only can be used when any mark point is

already stored.

Carrying out the loop playback

While stopped, press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while hold-

Once setting the Start and End points, you can carry

out the loop function.

ing down the [SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

Press the [LOOP] key to illuminate the key.

The loop function is now active.

Each time you press the [LOOP] key, On and Off of the

loop function alternates.

StartplaybackfromthepointearlierthantheStartpoint.

When the recorder reaches the End point, it automati-

cally locates to the Start point and starts playback from

that point. The recorder continues loop playback until

stopping the recorder.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Both the Start point and End point value fields show a

mark (number and name).

To stop loop playback, press the [LOOP] key to turn off

the lamp and press the [STOP] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Program

The VF80EX can have up to 99 programs (P01 through P99) and usually each program manages one song.

You can make recording against each program or playback materials recorded on each program.

This section describe program-related operations.

Note that you may use the program with the tentative

title ("#0002" in this example) if you do not need to en-

ter the desired one. Anyway, you may also enter/edit

the title later by the procedure described in "Editing a

program title" on page 62.

To use the program with the tentative title, press the

[EXIT/NO] key. To put the desired title, see the following.

Creating a new program

When formatting a hard disk, a program (P01) is au-

tomatically created.

To create a new program, follow the procedure below

while the recorder is stopped and the display shows

the Normal screen.

<Note>

The initial settings for a new program are copied from the

setting of the current program.

Therefore, if you want to make a new program with the

same settings as an existing program, bring up the pro-

gram before creating a new program.

• Rotate the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR

] keys)

to select a character for the blinking point from

among those listed below.

• Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the blinking

point.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a pro-

gram appears. (The screen example below shows the

initial condition where only Program 01 exists.)

<Hint>

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial

while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among

characters surrounded with the box above.

This function will allow you to save time for select-

ing a desired character.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight "P02 [New Program]"

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

When highlighting "P02 [New Program]", only high-

lighted "SELECT" is shown at the bottom of the screen.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key creates a new program

(P02 in this example) with the tentative title whose

leftmost character ("#" in this example) is highlighted.

In this condition, you can enter the program title by

following the procedure described in "<How to enter a

desired title> below.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after entering the title.

The title is set.

Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.

The setup mode exits and the display shows the Nor-

mal screen of the newly created program.

<Hint>

• When creating a new program, the next program

number to the highest program number in the

existing programs is assigned.

If there is only one program (P01), Program 02

(P02) will be created. If there is five programs (P01

through P05), Program 06 (P06) will be created.

• Creating a new program consumes a small amount

of the recordable disk space. Also note that when

the recordable disk space is not enough, you

cannot create a new program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

Selecting a program

Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

When more than one program exists on the disk, you

have to select the desired program before starting

operations for recording, playback or editing.

Selectthedesiredprogrambyfollowingtheprocedure

below while the recorder is stopped and the display

shows the Normal screen.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the program to be de-

leted and then press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while

holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows "Delete! Sure?", asking you confirm.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the desired program and

then press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

<Hint>

Youmayusethe[CURSOR ] tohighlight"DELETE"and

press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen

above, instead of pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The selected (highlighted) program is deleted, and the

following programs in the list move up.

Deleting a program

You can delete an unnecessary program individually.

To make recording or editing, a certain amount of disk

space is needed. By deleting unnecessary programs,

the available disk space increases.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to switch to the Normal screen.

The previous program of the deleted program is se-

lected.

<Notes>

• When only one program (P01) exists, if you try to

delete the program, the data in the program is deleted

but P01 remains.

Editing a program title

You can edit a program title anytime by following the

procedure below.

Note that you can also enter a program title in the

process of creating a new program as mentioned ear-

lier.

• For example, when five programs (P01 through P05)

exist, if you delete P03, it looks like P05 is deleted. This

is because the program numbers higher than 03 move

down. In other words, P04 and P05 become P03 and

P04 respectively.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

P05

P03

P04

P02

P01

the [SHIFT] key.

Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

P03 is deleted.

P03

P04

P02

P01

Notethatyoucannotundoorredodeletingtheprogram.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

You can put a title name with up to 16 characters from

among those listed below.

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial while

holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among characters

surrounded with the box below.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight (select) the desired pro-

gram and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while

holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Now you can edit the title of the selected program.

The leftmost character of the selected program is flash-

ing.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after editing/entering the

title.

The edited/entered title is set.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR ] to highlight "RENAME"

and press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen

above, instead of pressing the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing (ed-

iting) point and use the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR

keys) to select a character for the flashing point.

]

Track editing

Because the VF80EX uses a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk as the recording media, you can make non-linear and non-

destructive audio editing by track effectively.

Copy & Paste

Move & Paste

The Copy & Paste function allows you to copy track

data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of

the same or different track.

The Move & Paste function allows you to move track

data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of

the same or different track.

The copied data remains after pasting the data, so you

can paste the data as many times as required.

The copy & paste function is useful when using the

same musical part repeatedly in a song.

Unlike the copy & paste operation, the moved data

does not remain in the original position.

Copy & paste within the same track.

Move & paste within the same track.

Copy & paste between different track.

Move & paste between different track.

START Point END Point

TO Point

<Notes>

• Copy data (or Move data) is replaced with the new data every time the copy (or move) operation is carried out.

• Note that copy data changes if you paste the copy data to the original data.

• The copy & paste (or move & paste) editing is performed on the current program. Therefore, do not change the current

program until the editing operations are completed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of

the source track(s) light in green, while the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of the destination

track(s) light in red.

Performing Copy (or Move) & Paste

Set the Start and End points for the copy (or move)

operation andTo point for the paste operation.

Using the digital scrub function, set the Start, End and

To points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details

about how to set the points.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting tracks.

The display shows the "Point Select" screen as below, in

which you can view the Start, End and To points set via

the digital scrub operation.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

<Hints>

On the screen above, you can perform the following

operations.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Copy Paste" (or "Move

Paste") and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the source

track(s) and destination track(s).

1. Editing the Start, End andTo points

2. Setting the Start andTo points to "ABS 0" and the End point

to "REC END"

3. Checking the data to be copied (or moved)

4. Setting the Start, End andTo points by marks

or "MovePaste"

• To edit the Start, End andTo points:

Highlight the time field of the desired (Start, End orTo) point,

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The "seconds" value starts flashing, showing that you can

edit it. Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing

value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.

After entering the desired time, pressing the[ENTER/YES]

key to store the time data to the point.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s) from

which the data is copied (moved).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1

through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.

•To set the Start andTo points to "ABS 0" and the End

point to "REC END":

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start and To

points are set to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC

END" point. This function is useful when you copy (or

move) all track data (from "ABS 0" to "REC END") to dif-

ferent track(s).

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight (and flashes) the

right field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destina-

tion track(s) to which the data is copied (moved).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options as below

depending on the track(s) you selected in step 4.

•To check (monitor) the data to be copied (or moved)

[Source Play function]:

Source track(s)

Destination options

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown

below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be

copied (or moved).

a mono track (1 through 8)

a pair of tracks

1-6

1-8

1 through 8

1&2, 3&4, 5&6, and 7&8

1-6 only

1-8 only

In the example below, data on tracks 3&4 is copied (or

moved) and pasted onto tracks 7&8.

Youcanhearaudiobymovingupthecorrespondingtrack

fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key.

The display returns to the screen shown before perform-

ing the Source play function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Pressthe[UNDO/REDO/F3]keywhileholdingdownthe

[SHIFT] key.

The copy & paste (or move & paste) function is per-

formed. When finished, "Completed!" appears on the

screen.

•To set editing points by marks:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Each data field for the Start, End and To points changes

to show the current option by mark as shown below.

Use the [CURSOR

] keys to highlight the field for the

desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The field starts flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR >] to highlight "EXE" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of

pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The point is set to the selected mark.

<Note>

Thisoperationcanbeperformedonlywhenanymark

is set. When no mark is set, "00:ABS 0" is the one and

only option for each point.

The copy & paste (or move & paste) operation cannot be

performed when there is not enough disk space to per-

form the undo and redo operations. If you try to perform

the paste operation when there is not enough disk space,

The display will show "OverTime!", as well as the short

time.

In such a case, shorten the copy (or move) data by the

amount more than the displayed time or delete unnec-

essary sections or programs to keep the enough space,

and then try to paste again.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the field ("01"

above) for the number of times for repeat paste, and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

"01" starts flashing and you can now enter the number

of times for repeat paste.

Undo/redo of Copy & Paste

You can undo a copy & paste or move & paste opera-

tion, as well as redo it (undo the undo operation).

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing the

copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you can

return the track(s) to the condition before performing

the copy & paste (or move & paste) operation.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after

performingtheundooperation, youcanundotheundo

operation and return the track(s) to the condition

after performing the copy & paste (or move & paste)

operation.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired number and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You can select any number between "01" and "99".

<Note>

Basically you can select the number of times for repeat

paste between 1 and 99, however, if the recordable space

of the hark disk is limited, you may not be able to select

the desired number. The VF80EX automatically calcu-

late the available space and limit the number of times to

the appropriate value.

Note the following for performing the undo/redo opera-

tion.

<Notes>

You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.

If you carry out any of the following after performing the

copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you cannot

undo/redo the copy & paste (or move & paste) opera-

tion.

When setting the number of times for repeat paste to 02,

the copy & paste function is performed as below.

Copy & paste within the same track.

1.Making a new recording

2.Performing a new editing

A''

3.Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)

mode and pass through the auto punch-in point while

the auto punch mode is active

4.Turning off the power of the VF80EX

5.Performing any of the program operations (select,

rename or delete).

Copy & paste between different track.

START Point END Point

TO Point

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Use the [JOG] dial to select the track(s) to be erased.

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1

through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.

The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key(s)

of the selected track(s) light in red.

Erasing track data

You can erase a desired part of track data. You can

select a track or tracks (of which you are going to erase

data) from among each individual track, each pair of

tracks, 1-6 and 1-8.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the track(s).

The screen shows the Start and End points.

REC END

ABS 0

Erase

START Point END Point

• When all eight tracks (1 through 8) are recorded, if you

erase a part of the chosen track, only the erased part

becomes silent (no audio) and the following material

does not move advance to fill the gap.

Therefore, the REC END point remains the same.

However, if you erase a part between the chosen point

(=Start point) and the REC END point (=End point) of

all tracks, the REC END point moves advance.

<Hint>

On the screen above, you can perform the following

operations.

1. Editing the Start and End points

2. Setting the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to "REC

END"

3. Checking the data to be erased

4. Setting the Start and End points by marks

• The erase operations are performed on the current

program. Therefore, do not change the current pro

gram until all the operations are completed.

•To edit the Start and End points:

Highlight the time field of a desired (Start or End) point, and

then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The "seconds" value starts flashing, showing that you can

Erasing

edit it. Use the [CURSOR

] keys to move the flashing

Set the Start and End points for the erase operation.

value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.

After entering the desired time, pressing the [ENTER/YES]

key to store the time data to the point.

Using the digital scrub function, set the Start and End

points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details

about how to set the points.

•To set the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to

"REC END":

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start point is set

to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC END" point.

This function is useful when you erase all track data.

While the recorder is stopped,press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

•To check (monitor) the data to be erased [Source Play

function]:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown

below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be

erased.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Erase" and then press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the track(s)

to be erased.

You can hear audio by moving up the corresponding

track fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key.

The display returns to the screen shown before perform-

ing the Source play function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

•To set editing points by marks:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Undo/redo of Erase

You can undo an erase operation, as well as redo it

(undo the undo operation).

Each data field for the Start and End points changes to

show the current option by mark as shown below.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing

the erase operation, you can return the track(s) to the

condition before performing the erase operation.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after

performing the undo operation, you can undo the

undo operation and return the track(s) to the

condition after performing the erase operation.

Use the [CURSOR

desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The field starts flashing.

] keys to highlight the field for the

Note the following for performing the undo/redo op-

eration.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

<Notes>

The editing point is set to the selected mark.

You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.

If you carry out any of the following after performing

the erase operation, you cannot undo/redo the erase

operation.

<Note>

This operation can be performed only when any mark

is set. When no mark is set, "00:ABS 0" is the one and

only option for each point.

1. Making a new recording

2. Performing a new editing

3. Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)

mode and pass through the auto punch-in point

while the auto punch mode is active

4. Turning off the power of the VF80EX

5. Performing any of the program operations (select,

rename or delete).

Pressthe[UNDO/REDO/F3]keywhileholdingdownthe

[SHIFT] key.

The erase function is performed. When finished, "Com-

pleted!" appears on the screen.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR ] to highlight "EXE" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of

pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among

single tracks (1 through 24), pair tracks (1&2 through

23&24), 1-8, 9-16 and 17-24.

Track Exchange

The track exchange function allows you to exchange

tracks (regardless of whether they are real or addi-

tional tracks) on the program in single track unit, 2-

track unit or 8-track unit.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight (and flashes) the

right field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destina-

By using this function, you can exchange tracks not

only among real tracks but also between real and

additional tracks, allowing to use tracks effectively.

For example, by exchanging a recorded real track with

an empty additional track, you can transfer data on

a real track to an additional track temporarily, so that

you can record a new material onto the real track.

The track exchange function is also used to check the

REC END point on an additional track.

tion track(s).

You can only select the same number of tracks as the

source track(s) selected in step 3 above.

For example, if you select a single track in step 3 above,

you can only select a single track here.

<Example 1> ExchangingTrack 8 andTrack 24

One track exchange

8 track block exchange

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 17

Track 18

Track 19

Track 20

Track 21

Track 22

Track 23

Track 24

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 13

Track 14

Track 15

Track 16

<Example 2> ExchangingTracks 1&2 andTracks 7&8

2 track block exchange

8 track block exchange

<Example 3> ExchangingTracks 1-8 andTracks 17-24

Performing the track exchange

While the recorder is stopped,press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The track exchange function is performed and the dis-

play returns to the Normal screen.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Exchange" and then press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

If the selected tracks for the left and right fields are re-

versed, the same track exchange is performed.

For example, "1-8<->17-24" and "17-24<->1-8" perform the

same track exchange.

The setting in which the same track(s) are selected for

both the left and right fields, such as "1-8<->1-8", is invalid.

If you press the [ENTER/YES] key with such a setting, the

display shows the message "Select Err! Hit Any Keys".

The display shows the screen for selecting the tracks to

be exchanged. The screen example below shows that

tracks 01 through 08 and tracks 17 through 24 are ex-

changed in 8-track unit.

The left field shows the source track(s), while the right

fields shows the destination track(s).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Editing Marks

Thissectiondescribeshowtoeditmarks, assumingthatmorethanonemarkisalreadystoredinrealtime

according to the operations described in "Basic Recording and Playback".

Viewing the mark list

Editing a mark position

You can edit the current position of a mark in the

mark map.

You can view the marks stored.

While the recorder is stopped,press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Themarkpositionsareshownbytimeorbar/beat/clock

values depending on the time base (In the following

screen example, the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk").

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

the desired mark,and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/

] keys to highlight

F2] key.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

the marks stored.

In the Mark map screen, you can not only view all the

marks but also perform various operations (such as

editing a mark position, entering a mark title, locating

a mark, deleting a mark and adding a mark) described

later.

] keys to scroll

The display shows the screen for editing the chosen

mark.

Blinking

<Hint>

When the Mark map screen is shown, you can switch

the screen to display the position (by time or bar/

beat/clock) or title of each mark by pressing the

[TIME BASE SEL] key.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight (and flashes)

the field you want to edit, and then use the [JOG] dial

to select the desired value.

When the time base is set to "ABS" or "MTC", you can

edit fields for minute, second, frame and subframe.

When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk", you can

edit fields for bar, beat and clock, as shown below.

After viewing the list, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Aftereditingtime(orbar/beat/clock),pressthe[ENTER/

YES] key.

The edited value is stored to the mark and the display

returns to the Mark map screen.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Enter a mark title

Adding a mark

You can enter or edit a title for each mark.

You can add a mark to the mark map.

While the recorder is stopped,press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

light the desired mark, and then press the [TIME BASE

] keys to high-

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

light "New Mark", and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/

F2] key.

] keys to high-

SEL/F2] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the chosen

mark.

You can find "[New Mark]" at the bottom of the mark map.

Flashing

Press the [CURSOR / ] keys repeatedly to highlight

(and flashes) the leftmost point of the title field.

Flashing

Highlight (and flashes) this point.

On the screen for editing the mark, "001" (Bar number

field) is flashing, showing that it can be edited.

The mark name is tentatively set to "Mark", while no

scene is assigned (indicated by "Non").

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the highlighted

point among the title field, and use the [JOG] dial to

select the desired character.

You can use up to 14 characters for each title but be-

cause of the screen size, characters displayed at once

are limited. You can select a character from among the

following.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight (and flashes)

the field you want to edit among BAR, BEAT and CLK,

and then use the [JOG] dial to select the desired value.

When setting the time base to ABS or MTC, you can set

the position in the similar way.

Aftersettingthemarkposition, pressthe[ENTER/YES]

key.

The new mark is added to the mark map and the dis-

play returns to the Mark map screen.

Hint

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial

while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among

characters surrounded with the box above.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

After entering/editing the title, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The entered/edited title is stored to the mark.

<Hint>

When adding a new mark, you can also enter a mark title

or assign a scene for the scene sequence function.

See "Enter a mark title" above and "Scene Memory" in "Mixer

Functions" for details about operations.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recorder Functions (VF80EX)

Deleting a mark

Locating a mark

You can delete an unnecessary mark.

You can directly locate to a mark.

While the recorder is stopped,press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

light the mark you want to delete, and then press the

[UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the [SHIFT]

key.

"Delete!" is shown and "Sure?" flashes.

To cancel the delete operation, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

] keys to high-

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR

light the mark you want to locate to,and then press the

[SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The recorder locates to the selected mark, and the dis-

play returns to the Normal screen.

] keys to high-

<Hint>

If you press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key after editing a mark position (see "Editing a

mark position"), you can locate to the new mark position.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The chosen mark is deleted and the mark map is sorted,

resulting marks following the deleted mark in the mark

map list move up.

For example, if you delete Mark 03, the current Mark

04, 05,... will replace Mark 03, 04,.... respectively.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Advanced Operations

This chapter describes advanced or useful functions of the VF80EX.

Metronome function

The VF80EX provides the internal tempo map, in which you can set the time signature (e.g. 4/4, 3/4) and tempo

(between 30 and 250).

It also can output the metronome sound (click) according to the tempo map, allowing you to record materials

at the specific tempo without the need of an external metronome or rhythm machine.

The metronome sound can be output from Track 6 of the VF80 when you set "Click?" in the Setup menu to "On."

<Note>

When Track 6 is set to output the metronome sound (i.e. when you set "Click?" menu in the Setup menu to "On"),

you cannot record audio on Track 6 or playback audio recorded on Track 6.

When you have finished using the metronome function, we recommend setting "Click?" menu in the Setup mode

to "Off" so that you can use Track 6 for recording and playback.

Setting the tempo map

Setting the metronome output

Youcansetwhetheroutputtingthemetronomesound

or not by "Click?" menu in the Setup mode.

To output the metronome sound (click), the tempo

map must be set.

To set the tempo map, use "Signature Set" and "Tempo

Set" menus in the Setup mode.

Initially, the time signature is set to "4/4" while the

tempo is set to "120."

Usethe[JOG]dialtoselectthe"Click?"menu,andthen

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The initial setting is "Off."

To change the initial settings, operate the following.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "On", and then press the

While theVF80EX is stopped, press the [SETUP] key

[ENTER/YES] key.

to enter the Setup mode.

Now the metronome sound will be output from Track

The screen for selecting a menu in the Setup mode ap-

pears.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until exiting the

Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Signature Set" menu,

Setup mode.

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The screen for setting the time signature appears.

Set the desired time signature according to the proce-

duredescribedin"Settingthetimesignature"onpage 134.

Setting the time base to bar/beat

After setting the time signature, press the [EXIT/NO]

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key to set the time base to

key to return to the screen for selecting a menu in the

Setup mode.

"Bar/Beat."

When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat", you can moni-

tor the current position by Bar/Beat according to the

tempo map you set.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Tempo Set" menu,and

then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The screen for setting the tempo appears.

Set the desired tempo according to the procedure de-

scribed in "Setting the tempo" on page 136.

Monitoring the metronome sound

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback of theVF80EX.

After setting the tempo, press the [EXIT/NO] key to

ThelevelmeterforTrack6showsthemetronomesound

level.

return to the screen for selecting a menu in the Setup

mode.

Set the Master and Track 6 faders to the "0" position,

and raise the [PHONES] knob to monitor the metronome

sound via the headphones.

Go on to set the metronome output described below.

You can now record a material while listening to the

metronome sound as a guide.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Track bounce (Ping-pong recording)

When the number of empty tracks is short in the recording process, you can solve the problem by transferring

audio on the multiple already-recorded tracks to a different track or tracks.

This operation is called "Track bounce" or "Ping-pong recording". With the VF80EX, you can do this operation sim-

ply by using the [BOUNCE] key.

When the Bounce mode is active, Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the materials recorded on Tracks 1

through 6 are ready to be bounced to Tracks 7/8.

In the following description for track bouncing operation, we assume that mono materials are recorded on Tracks

1 through 4, while a stereo material is recorded on Tracks 5 and 6.

<Note>

On/Off of bounce mode

If the peak indicator lights up, the recorded sound

will be distorted. Adjust the playback level of each

track appropriately.

Press the [BOUNCE] key.

Each press of the key alternates "On" and "Off."

When set to "On", the key is illuminated, while the

Bounce screen appears where "Remain" is displayed.

You can see the playback levels on Tracks 1 through 6,

input levels on Track 7/8 and output levels of the Ste-

reo busses (L and R) via the meters on the screen.

By raising the [PHONES] knob, you can monitor the

sound.

Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the corre-

sponding[TRACKSTATUS/TRACKSEL] keyflashesinred.

When the Bounce mode is active, you cannot arm the

other tracks (1 through 6).

After adjusting the levels, stop the recorder and then

locate to the beginning position of track bouncing.

Setting pan positions

Performing the track bounce

Press the [PAN] key to set the pan position for each

track.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start track bouncing.

The recorder starts recording of mixed audio from

Tracks 1 through 6 to Tracks 7/8.

Set the pan positions at the desired points for Tracks 1

through 4, fully left for Track 5 and fully right for Track

6. See "Mixer Functions" for details about the pan set-

ting.

After finishing the track bounce, press the [STOP] key

to stop the recorder.

NowyoucanuseTracks 1 through 6 torecordnew

materials.

After setting all pan positions,press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The balance mode screen appears.

Setting level of each track

<Notes>

• You can also apply EQ and/or effects to audio signals

on Tracks 1 through 6 to be bounce to Track 7/8.

See "Mixer Function" for details about how to apply EQ

and effects.

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Press the [RECORD] key only.

The[RECORD] keystartsflashing,whileTracks7/8enter

the input monitor mode.

• When the Bounce mode is active, you can use any of

effect types L01 through L38. Note that, if you enter

the Bounce mode when any of insert effect types is

selected, “L01: Norm HALL” will be automatically

selected.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback and adjust play-

back levels ofTracks 1 through 6 using the track fad-

ers.

Be careful not to light up the peak indicator when ad-

justing the playback level of each track.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Training mode

The VF80EX provides the training mode which allows you to practice your instrument while playing back only

Tracks 7/8. In the training mode, you can slow down the playback speed or altering the pitch, making it easy to

play along with your favorite musicians or transcribing ad-lib phrases.

You can also cancel the vocal or lead guitar solo which is positioned in the center, allowing you to replace it with

your vocal or guitar (like a karaoke).

The following description shows how to play the guitar along with audio recorded on Tracks 7/8.

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

MUTE

PLAY

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK MASTER

CURSOR

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

<Hint>

On/Off of training mode

Because only Tracks 7/8 can be played back in the Train-

ing mode, you have to record a song used for your prac-

tice in advance.

If you are going to use a song recorded on other tracks,

it will be a good idea to use the track exchange function

to move the song to Tracks 7/8.

Press the [TRAINING] key.

Each press of the key alternates "On" and "Off."

When set to "On", the [TRAINING] key is illuminated,

while the display shows the training mode screen.

Also, when you want to use an external source on CD,

MD, etc., record it onto Tracks 7/8 digitally using the

technique described later in "Digital Recording."

When copying a copyright material from CD, MD, etc.,

do not use the copy for any purpose except your prac-

tice or enjoyment. Any unauthorized use of the copy

for commercial purpose will constitute infringement

of such copyright and will render the infringer liable

to an action at law.

On the training mode screen, you can set the follow-

ing. You can use the [CURSOR

] key to select (high-

light) the item to be set.

<Note>

When the training mode is active, you cannot make any

recording, as well as playback Tracks 1 through 6.

1. Playback speed

2. Playback pitch

3. On/Off of the center cancel function

4. Setting of the cancel position

5. Low boost setting (for emphasizing the bass

sound)

Connecting the instrument and headphones

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "∞" position.

<Note>

Connect the instrument and headphones as shown in

the illustration above.

You can set the playback speed only while the

VF80EX is stopped. The other items can be set both

while stopped and during playback.

You may connect the instrument either [INPUT A] or

[INPUT B].

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Slowing down the playback speed

Setting the cancel position

You can change the playback speed only while the

recorder is stopped.

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Cancel

Pos" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the de-

sired value.

When "Norm" in the "Play Speed" field is highlighted,

You can select the cancel position from "-99" via "0" to

"+99" in one step increments.

Try to find the best position where the sound to be

cancel gets lowest.

use the [JOG] dial to select "Half."

The playback speed is set to half the normal speed and

the pitch automatically raises one octave.

To change only the pitch, see the next section.

To return to the normal speed, use the [JOG] dial to

select "Norm."

The playback speed returns to the normal speed.

Boosting the bass sound

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Lo Boost"

field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the desired

value.

You can select the low boost level from "0" to "10" in one

step increments.

Changing the pitch

The following items can be set both while stopped and

during playback.

Usingthe[CURSOR ]keytohighlightthe"PlayPitch"

field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select the desired

pitch.

You can set the pitch within the range of +/- one octave.

Playing along with the playback sound

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Canceling the center-positioned sound

Press the [PLAY] key to starts playback of theVF80EX

and raise theTrack 7/8 fader gradually.

You can see the level is going up via the stereo output

level meters (L and R) on the screen.

Rotate the [PHONES] knob to adjust the headphones

level.

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Vo. Can-

cel" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select "ON".

You can cancel the center-positioned sound such as a

lead vocal.

Depending on audio sources, you may not perfectly

cancel the sound you want to remove because it is not

exactly center-positioned. In such a case, perform the

next operation.

Play the guitar along with the playback sound ofTracks

7/8, while adjusting the [TRIM] knob to the appropri-

ate position where the [PEAK] indicator for the input

you connect the guitar does not light.

You can hear both the playback sound of Tracks 7/8

and your guitar together from the headphones.

If you move down the Tracks 7/8 fader, you can only

hear your guitar.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Mastering mode

You can use Tracks 7/8 as the mastering tracks.

After performing the track bouncing from Tracks 1 through 6 to Tracks 7/8, you can record the audio signals on

Tracks 7/8 to an external (analog or digital) master recorder while applying the "mastering effects" including

EQ, reverb and compressor (see the illustration below).

You can perform the above operation in the mastering mode, which can be selected by the [MASTERING] key.

When the mastering mode is active, only Tracks 7/8 can be played back, while the dedicated mastering effects

are available. In the following description, we assume that the stereo mix signals are recorded on Tracks 7/8.

STEREO OUT L, R

Digital master recorder

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

S/P DIF OUTPUT

Analog master recorder

You can select a desired preset entry

from 10 entries (L0 through L9) stored

in the effect library. See "Mastering li-

brary details" on the next page.

Selecting a program to be played back

Mastering library

If there is more than one program in the VF80, select

the desired program to be played back.

See "Selecting a program" for the operation.

Adjusts the EQ gain for the high fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

High Gain

On/Off of mastering mode

Adjusts the EQ gain for the middle fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

Mid Gain

Press the [MASTERING] key.

Each press of the [MASTERING] key alternates ON and

OFF of the mastering mode.

Adjusts the EQ gain for the low fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

When the mastering mode is set to ON, the [MASTER-

ING] key is illuminated and the following screen is dis-

played, while the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of

Track 7/8 and the [STATUS/SEL] key for the master are

illuminated in green.

Low Gain

Rev Level

Adjusts the amount of reverb sound be-

tween 0 and 99.

Ambience

The values of these parameters for

each entry are fixed (see "Mastering

library details" on pages 77 and 78).

RevTime

Pre Delay

Adjusts the threshold of the compres-

sor between -50 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB

steps.

Threshold

Ratio

Selects the compressor ratio from the

following options.

∞:1, 20:1, 10:1, 8:1, 6:1, 5:1, 4:1, 3.5:1,

3:1, 2.5:1, 2:1, 1,7:1, 1.5:1, 1.3:1, 1.1:1,

1:1

The screen example above shows the upper part of the

mastering effect setting. Pressing the [CURSOR ] key

scrolls down the setting items. To scroll up, press the

[CURSOR ] key.

Compressor

Adjusts the compressor gain between

0 dB and +18 dB.

Gain

The parameter value for each entry is

fixed (see "Mastering library details" on

pages 77 and 78).

Atack

Selects ON or OFF of the copy protec-

tion for the S/P DIF output signal.

When set to ON, the flag for limiting a

digital copy to one generation is set in

the S/P DIF digital output signal.

Copy Protect

The table below shows the mastering effect items.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

After setting the recording level, return theVF80EX to

the beginning of the program.

<Hint>

When selecting a desired preset entry from the Master-

ing effect library, the initial parameter values of the en-

try are shown on the screen.

See "Mastering effect library details" on pages 77 and 78

for the detailed information.

Start recording of the master recorder and then start

playback of theVF80EX.

The stereo output (L and R) signals are recorded onto

the master recorder.

Setting the mastering effect parameters

After finishing recording, stop the both machines.

Set the [MASTER] fader at the "0" position.

<Hint>

Start playback and move up theTrack 7/8 fader gradu-

ally.

You can monitor the playback sound of Tracks 7/8 by

rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise.

In the mastering mode, you cannot monitor the play-

back sound of other tracks even if you move up the

faders.

When you record VF80EX audio onto a digital mas-

ter recorder via the S/P DIF digital signal, if the copy

protection ("Cp Protect") is set to "ON", you can limit

the digital copy from the master to another recorder.

If you do not want to make digital copies freely from

the master, set the copy protection to "ON."

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight the param-

eter value to be edited,and use the [JOG] dial to select

the desired value.

You can monitor the tailored sound of Tracks 7/8 in

realtime.

Mastering effect library details

The mastering effect library provides 10 preset en-

tries which can only be used in the mastering mode.

When applying mastering effects to the sound, you

can use a desired preset as a starting point of your

setting.

<Hint>

When any parameter value is changed from the

initial setting, "E" appears on the right of the preset

entry name (as shown below), showing that the cur-

rent setting is different from the initial setting.

The following table shows the initial settings of EQ,

reverb and compressor parameters.

Basic mastering set-

tings.

L0: FLAT

Gain

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

Can be used for a wide

range of music genre.

L-S

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

1kHz

On/off of the mastering effects

H-S

4kHz

To switch on or off the mastering effects,use the [CUR-

SOR / ] key to highlight the ON/OFF icon as shown

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

below, and use the [JOG] dial to select "ON" or "OFF".

When "ON" is selected, the tailored sound is output.

When "OFF" is selected, the original sound is output.

Comp THSHD

-25

4 : 1

+10

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Atack Time = 8ms : fixed

Makes a dry sound

wet.

L1:Wet Mix

Gain

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

L-S

1.0

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

1kHz

Recording onto the master recorder

+4.0

H-S

8kHz

Stand by the master recorder for recording, and start

playback of theVF80EX.

Ambience

75 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=0.5s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

You have to adjust the recording level now.

When the recording signal is digitally transferred from

the VF80EX to the recorder, because a digital recorder

usually does not provide the function for controlling

the digital input level, you must adjust the recording

level by controlling the stereo output level of the

VF80EX using the [MASTER] fader.

Comp THSHD

-30

3 : 1

+10

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Powerful sound.

Makes a dark sound

bright.

L6: Hard

L2: Light Mix

Gain

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

Gain

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

L-S

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

1kHz

4kHz

L-S

1.0

EQ Lo

400Hz

1kHz

EQ Mid

H-S

EQ Hi

+4.0

H-S

8kHz

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Comp THSHD

-36

Comp THSHD

-42

3 : 1

+18

8 : 1

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

+18

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Atack Time = 10ms : fixed

Soulful and energetic

sound of 70s'.

L7: 70s

L3: Live Mix

Makes a sound like

recorded in a small

live house.

Gain

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

-6

L-S

1.0

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

L-S

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

1kHz

400Hz

1kHz

6kHz

H-S

LPF-ON

LPF

-18

8kHz

Ambience

99 (Rev Level)

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=0.1s / Pre Dly=30ms : fixed

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Comp THSHD

-20

1.5 : 1

Comp THSHD

-10

5 : 1

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Makes a sound like

recorded in a concert

hall.

Suitable for typical

pop music with vocal.

L8: Hall

L4: Pop Mix

Gain

-3

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

-4

-8

L-S

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

500Hz

6kHz

L-S

2.0

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

500Hz

-3

H-S

4kHz

Ambience

80 (Rev Level)

Ambience

80 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=3.0s / Pre Dly=100ms : fixed

Rev Time=0.7s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

-36

3.5 : 1

+18

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

-25

1.5 : 1

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Atack Time = 10ms : fixed

Atack Time = 8ms : fixed

Narrow range sound

by limiting the fre-

quency range drasti-

cally.

L5: Dance

L9: LO_Fi

Suitable for a dancing

floor.Aspeedy sound

which makes an audi-

ence excite.

Gain

+10

-18

Gain

-18

Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

Freq. (fixed)

400Hz

2kHz

Q (fixed)

L-S

3.5

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

400Hz

550Hz

L-S

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

+15

3.5

10kHz

LPF-ON

LPF

2kHz

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Ambience

0 (Rev Level)

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Comp THSHD

-30

Comp THSHD

-25

5 : 1

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

∞ : 1

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

+14

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Internal Mastering Mode

The internal mastering mode is an expansion of the mastering mode described earlier.

It allows you to record a mixed-down material on tracks 7 and 8 to the current drive on the VF80EX

while applying a mastering effect.

Therefore, unlike the mastering mode, this mode allows you to make high-quality mastering inside

the VF80EX, without the need of an external master recorder.

By using the built-in CD-R/RW drive, you can burn original audio CDs from materials mastered in

the internal mastering mode. See "Making an Audio CD" on page 125 for details.

Analog Master Recorder

Digital Master Recorder

Mastering Effect

New Program

ST OUT

Tracks 1 & 2

Tracks 7 & 8

S/P DIF OUT

VF80EX

Mastering Effect

<Figure-2>

In the internal mastering mode, mastering

is done inside the VF80EX, as shown in <Fig-

ure-2> above.

Tracks 7 & 8

<Figure-1>

VF80EX

After executing internal mastering, a new program which saves a mastered material is automatically created

on the current drive, whose program number is set to one greater than the current greatest program number.

For example, if there are 8 programs (P01 through 08) on the current drive, after mastering a desired program

data using the internal mastering mode, a new program (P09) is automatically created and the mastered

material is recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of P09.

Note that if the VF80EX is under either of the following conditions, you cannot carry out internal mastering.

1. There are 99 programs already existed on the current drive even though there is enough

recording space.

If you try to carry out internal mastering, "Can't New PGM!" is shown and the operation is ignored.

To carry out internal mastering, delete an unnecessary program.

2. There is not enough remaining space even though there are less than 99 programs on the current

drive.

If you try to carry out internal mastering, "OverTime!" is shown and the operation is ignored.

To carry out internal mastering, erase unnecessary song data or delete an unnecessary program.

See "Deleting a program" on page 62 and "Erasing track data" on page 66.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Rehearsing internal mastering

Before performing internal mastering, you can rehearse it as many times as you like, while adjust-

ing the track 7/8 level and sound effects.

In the following description, we assumes that a stereo pair of materials is recorded on tracks 7/8 of

the current program and a pair of headphones is connected to the [PHONES] jack for monitoring.

[PHONES] [TRACK EDIT]

[MASTERING]

[ENTER/YES]

INPUT A

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

PHONES

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

SCENE SCENE SEQ.

TRACK

EDIT

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

1^[JOG]

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

1[SHIFT]

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

MARK

DELETE

EDIT

CD PLAY

7[STOP] + [REWIND]

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

4[PLAY]

[MASTER FADER]

[7/8 FADER]

6[STOP]

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

Select the desired program for mastering.

To select the desired program, while stopped, press

the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key, and select the program using the [JOG]

dial, then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

beginning of the selected program.

The VF80EX starts playback, while the display keeps

showing the screen for adjusting the mastering effects.

Tracks 1 and 2 are internally set to "input monitor",

allowing you to check over-level via the peak LED

indicators.

You can monitor the mastering sound through

headphones by raising the track 7/8 fader and/or

[PHONES] level control. The mastering levels are

shown on the level meters at the right on the screen.

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Press the [MASTERING] key.

The VF80EX enters the mastering mode and the dis-

play shows the mastering screen in which you can

adjust the mastering effects.

The [MASTERING] key lights up in red, while the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of tracks 7/8 and the master

channel light up in green.

During playback, adjust track 7/8 levels using

the 7/8 fader, as well as EQ and effect settings if

necessary.

Set the levels properly so that the PEAK LED indica-

tors do not flash or light frequently.

Note that levels may increase by changing EQ or

compressor parameters. When controlling the sound

characters and level, you should not only monitor the

level meters and listen to the sound, but also monitor

the PEAK LED indicators.

To adjusting the mastering effect parameters on the

mastering screen, use the [CURSOR] (

) keys to

select a parameter and the [JOG] dial to change the

parameter value.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate to the beginning of the pro-

gram.

<Hint>

On the mastering screen, you can tailor the sound

by adjusting EQ settings (HI, MID and LOW), as well

as the ambiance and compressor.

The VF80EX locates to the beginning of the program

immediately and "00m 00s" is shown at the top right

of the screen. Keep showing the same mastering screen

after stopping the VF80EX and locating to the begin-

ning of the program.

To repeat the rehearsal, perform steps 4 and 5 re-

peatedly after making the VF80EX locate to the be-

ginning of the program. After completing the rehearsal

satisfactorily, make sure to locate to the beginning of

the program.

See page 76 for details about the mastering effects.

<Note>

The "CpProtect" (Copy Protect) setting, which is one

of the mastering effect items, does not affect a mas-

tered material recorded by internal mastering. The

copy protect setting affects materials recorded on a

CD-RW/CD-R disc, described later.

See "Making an audio CD" on page 125.

<Note>

After completing the rehearsal, be careful not to

move the track 7/8 and master faders and change

the mastering effect parameters.

If you wish to do another work after the rehearsal,

you should save the settings (fader positions and

parameter settings) to a scene memory. See page

52 for details about the “scene memory” function.

After completing all the adjustments, press the

[STOP] key to stop the VF80EX.

Performing internal mastering

Before executing the take, read below, as well as notes on the next page.

As described earlier, the starting and ending time values of internal mastering are automati-

cally registered as the "Start point" and "End point" respectively, which are used for track

editing (copy, move and erase) for the newly created program (see the illustrations below).

When burning a CD-RW/CD-R, data between "Start point" and "End point" is automatically

recorded. In other words, you cannot make an audio CD (described later) if these points are not

set.

Data transferred to a CD-RW/CD-R disc

Start point

(automatically registered)

End point

(automatically registered)

New program (Tracks 1 & 2)

Internal mastering

Original program (Tracks 7 & 8)

Start point of internal mastering

End point of internal mastering

After executing internal mastering, you can check or edit the "Start point" and "End point"

which have been automatically set. See page 83 for detail.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

<Note:There is no need for selecting recording tracks.>

In the internal mastering mode, unlike the normal recording, you do not have to select recording tracks.

When recording a take in the internal mastering mode, the VF80EX automatically arms Tracks 1 and 2.

Therefore, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys for tracks 1 and 2 never light up in red in the internal

mastering mode.

<Note>

Internal mastering cannot be performed if rec-protected.

If the "Rec Protected" setting of the setup mode is set to "ON", you cannot perform internal mastering.

If you try to perform it, a warning message ("Protected!") appears on the display. If this message appears,

set the "Rec Protected" setting to "OFF" before performing internal mastering.

See page 141 for details about the setup mode.

<Note:You cannot undo an internal mastering take.>

You cannot undo an internal mastering take.

If you are not satisfied with the result, try again from the beginning. If you do not need a previously

recorded program, delete the program according to the procedure described in "Deleting a Program" on

page 62.

<Note:The vari-pitch setting is not effective.>

When recording a take in the internal mastering mode, the vari-pitch setting is not effective and the take

is always recorded at the normal speed.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key. (You cannot perform the auto

punch-in function.)

When mastering starts, a new program is automati-

cally created and the material is recorded onto tracks

1 and 2 of the program. The ABS time at which mas-

tering starts is registered with the "Start point" of the

new program.

As described on page 81, in the internal mastering

mode, the starting and ending time values of a take

are registered as the "Start point" and "End point"

respectively.

If the song immediately starts at the beginning of

the take and the the take immediately ends when

the song finishes, there may be no silent parts at

the beginning and end of the mastered song.

Therefore, if you make an audio CD containing more

than one song which is mastered as above, there

may be no silent part between two adjacent tracks

on the CD.

When completing mastering, press the [STOP]

key to stop.

"Please wait" appears on the display for a few seconds,

and the internal mastering mode quits, while the

VF80EX locates to the beginning (ABS 0) of the newly

created program. The ABS time at which you press

the [STOP] key is registered with the "End point" of the

new program.

Start point

End point

Start point

End point

Song 1

Song 3

The following screen example shows that a title named

"Song Data-1" is mastered onto a new program named

"P09". As shown in the example below, "Mst<-" is pre-

fixed to a mastered program title, so that you can dis-

tinguish mastered programs from other programs.

The screen can show up to the first 12 characters of a

title name.

Song 2

Start point

End point

To avoid such a problem, we recommend to record

"silence" by moving down the [MASTER] fader im-

mediately after the song ends and press the [STOP]

key after a few seconds (see the illustration below).

Start point

End point

mastered song

silent space

Put the [MASTER] fader

down completely.

A title example recorded using the internal mastering mode.

recording

Recording start point

Recording end point

Playback the newly created program (P09, in the

example above) to check the result.

You can adjust the playback levels of mastered tracks

using track faders 1 and 2.

Read the following "Hint" carefully before making an

original audio CD from mastered materials.

Note that you can also make a silent part later even

if you make mastering without recording "silent".

See "How to add a silent part to a mastered song"

on page 83.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

How to add a silent part to a mastered song

Checking the "Start point" and "End point"

Even if you have made mastering without recording

a silent part, do not worry. You can make a silent

part later by shifting the "End point" backwards

using the track editing function.

You can check the "start point" and "end point"

which are automatically registered after finishing

mastering. The following procedure is assumed that

a mastered program is loaded.

End point

Start point

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while theVF80

is stopped.

mastered song

The display shows the screen for track editing, where

silent space

"Copy Paste" flashes.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while the

VF80EX is stopped.

The display shows the screen for track editing, as

shown left.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting tracks, as

shown left.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting an original

and destination tracks for copy/paste.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

The display shows the screen, as shown left, in which

you can check "Start" and "End" points.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

Press the [CURSOR/down] key to highlight the End

The display shows the screen for selecting edit points,

in which you can check "Start" and "End" points that

hold the beginning and end points of the recording

respectively (pointed by arrows below).

point time data and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Now you can edit the End point time data.

Initially, the second field flashes.

For example, if you wish to shift back the End point

for five seconds from the current position

("00h03m00s00f00"), use the [JOG] dial to enter "05"

while the second field flashes.

After checking the "Start" and "End" points,

press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the track edit

mode.

The display returns to the previous screen before

performing step 1.

See page 123 about how to make an audio CD from

mastered materials.

<Note>

After finishing editing,press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The whole End point time data is highlighted and the

new value ("00h03m05s00f00") becomes effective.

You can edit the "Start point" and "End point" be-

fore creating an audio CD, allowing adjustment

of intervals between songs.

We recommend to set the "Start point" and "End

point" of the new program created by the inter-

nal mastering function to desired time values

before creating an audio CD.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until the edit

mode exits.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Using the insert effect

Unlike the loop effect described earlier in "Mixer Functions", the insert effect is applied when rere-

cording any recorded track among tracks 1 through 6.

This rerecording mode in which the insert effect is applied is called "REC EFFECT" mode.

Six distortion/simulation type effects are available for the insert effect. You can distort a guitar,

bass, drums or vocal, as well as simulate a famous guitar amplifier or microphone character.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 1

Track 2

ASP

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect

ASP

Effect

Track 1

Effect

Master Recorder

There are six effect types below available for the insert effect, in addition to 38 types for the loop effect as

described earlier in "Mixer Functions".

See page 86 for details about parameters for each effect type.

“L39: Gtr Dist (guitar distortion)”

“L42:Voice Dist (voice distortion)”

“L43: Gtr Amp Sim (guitar amp simulator)”

“L40: Bass Dist (bass distortion)”

“L41: Drum Dist (drum distortion)”

“L44: Mic Sim (microphone simulator)”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

The following explains how to record a guitar solo to track 1 and rerecord it while applying the

guitar distortion. Before executing recording, you can check the guitar sound with the distortion

effect while rehearsing the effect parameter settings until you satisfy with the sound.

We assume that the guitar is connected to the [INPUT A] connector and the VF80EX locates to the

beginning of the program (ABS 0).

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK MASTER

CURSOR

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Use the [JOG] dial to select "L39: Gtr Dist" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Rehearsal

You can check the guitar sound with an effect be-

fore recording.

"L39:Gtr Dist" should be selected for the guitar dis-

tortion.

"Insert Effect Selected!" is momentarily shown on the

display, followed by the parameter setting screen for

"L39: Gtr Dist".

Meanwhile, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys for

tracks 1 through 6 starts flashing, showing that you

can select a track to which the effect is inserted.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for

track 1 to arm track 1.

Only the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1

flashes, while the [CH ON/OFF] key lights.

Raise the track 1 fader and [MASTER] fader to

the "0" position.

If these faders are not raised, you cannot monitor the

sound.

Press the [RECORD] key.

Track 1 is switched to "Input monitor".

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for

track 1.

Only the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1

flashes, showing that track 1 is selected.

Adjust the gain appropriately using the [TRIM]

control for [INPUT A] while playing the guitar.

You can monitor the guitar sound by raising the

[PHONES] control.

Adjust parameters while playing the guitar to get

the desired sound.

You can select a desired parameter using the [CUR-

Press the [EFFECT] key repeatedly until the ef-

SOR]

keys and change the value using the [JOG]

fect type selection screen appears.

When you press the [EFFECT] key for the first time

after turning on the power, "L01:Norm HALL" is shown

as the effect type.

dial.

Before editing parameters, you can monitor the sound

with the default parameter settings.

The monitor sound changes in realtime when chang-

ing a parameter.

See the next page for details about the parameters for

"L39: Gtr Dist".

<Caution!>

Do not raise the headphones volume too loud while

monitoring the sound, which may damage your ears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

It will be a good idea to store a favorite pa-

rameter setting to a scene.

You can recall a stored setting whenever you

like. See page 52 for details about the scene

memory.

The "L39: Gtr Dist" effect type has 11 parameters as

shown below. (Note that the screen example below

shows all parameters for the explanation. Actually,

you can see 5 parameters at a time while the other

parameters are hidden.)

Use the [CURSOR]

keys to select a highlighted

parameter. Use the [JOG] dial to select the value of

the highlighted parameter.

The monitor sound changes in realtime when chang-

ing a parameter.

Recording the guitar

After making desired effect parameter settings in

rehearsal, record the guitar while monitoring the

effected sound.

Note that the dry sound is recorded though you

monitor the wet sound.

We assume that track 1 is "Input monitor" (i.e. the

[RECORD] key and the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

key for track 1 are flashing).

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to switch to the Normal

screen.

Selects a distortion type.

Options: Acous, Rythm, OvDrv, Dist, Blues,

Fuzz, Lead, Metal (Default: Dist)

1. DistType

2. Dist Gain

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start recording and play the

guitar.

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected.)

The dry sound is recorded to track 1 while the wet

sound is monitored.

The screen shows both the recording level of the gui-

tar and the monitor level.

Makes the sound warmer when On.

Options: ON, OFF (default: ON)

3.Warm

4. Bass

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

5. Middle

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

6.Treble

Press the [STOP] key to stop recording.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1 still

flashes, while the [RECORD] key turns off.

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

7. Noise Gate

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate to the beginning of the pro-

gram.

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

8. Out Level

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

9. DelayTime

To check the recorded "dry" sound just re-

corded, press the [EFFECT] key while holding

down the [SHIFT] key to turn off the effect,

then press [PLAY] key to start playback.

If you do not turn off the effect, the "wet"

playback sound is monitored with the effect

you set in rehearsal.

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

10. Feedback

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

11. Delay Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start recording.

Rerecording with effect

The final step is to rerecord the recorded "dry" sound

on track 1 while applying the effect (guitar distor-

tion) with the setting you made in rehearsal.

During recording in the “REC EFFECT mode”, the

[BOUNCE/REC EFF] key is flashing in red.

Press the [STOP] key to stop recording.

Press the [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key.

Press the [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key while hold-

ing down the [SHIFT] key.

The unit exits the REC EFFECT mode, and the [BOUNCE/

REC EFF] key turns off, while the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] key for track 1 lights steadily in green.

The unit enter the REC EFFECT mode, in which you

can apply the insert effect. The screen shows some-

thing like below.

The [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key and the [TRACK STATUS/

TRACK SEL] key for track 1 flash.

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate to the beginning of the pro-

gram.

Press the [EFFECT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to turn off the effect.

The [EFFECT] key turns off.

<Note>

Before playing back the rerecorded sound, always

turn off the effect by the above operation.

If you playback the rerecorded sound while the ef-

fect is set to ON, you will monitor the "wet" sound

with applying the effect.

When entering the REC EFFECT mode, the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1 flashes. You can

select any track to be recorded from among tracks

1 through 6 by pressing the appropriate [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning of the program.

You can confirm that the "dry" sound on track 1 is

replaced with the "wet" sound.

In this example, you are going to record to track 1,

so you do not have to change the setting.

Press the [EFFECT] key.

The effect type selection screen appears, where "L39

Gtr Dist" is selected. All parameter are set as you did

during rehearsal.

If you are not satisfied with the result, press the

[UNDO/REDO] key to undo the last recording, and

make recording again. Pressing the [UNDO/REDO]

key once returns track 1 to the "dry" sound.

Pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key again returns track 1

back to the "wet" sound.

If you like, try recording in the similar manner by select-

ing the other effect type.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, you can select an effect type

only from among L39 through L44.

If you enter the REC EFFECT mode from the

condition in which an effect type for the loop effect

is selected, "L39: Gtr Dist" will be initially selected.

If the effect is set to OFF, press the [EFFECT] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key to switch it to

ON.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, if you recall a scene in which

the loop effect is used, the effect type is not changed.

Or, when a track the insert effect is applied to is

selected, if you recall a scene in which a track the

insert effect is applied to is selected, the track

selection is not recalled. In such a case, use the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key to change the selection.

When applying the insert effect, you can adjust the

recording level by the "Out Level" parameter.

Before starting recording, check/adjust the record-

ing level by following the procedure below. Note

that the channel fader, [MASTER] fader, EQ and pan

only affect the monitor sound.

1. Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the "Out Level"

parameter.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, You cannot set "Scene

Sequence" and "Digital In" to ON. If you enter the

REC EFFECT mode while one or both of these are set

to ON, the unit automatically sets it (them) to OFF.

2. Press the [RECORD] key to monitor the input.

3. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, you cannot playback or

record tracks 7 and 8 (the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys never light up).

4. While monitoring the playback sound with

applying the effect, adjust the "Out Level" value

appropriately using the [JOG] dial so that the

PEAK indicator does not light frequently.

• To rerecord a desired part of a track with applying

the insert effect, it will be a good idea to use the auto

punch-in/out function. See page 33 for details about

the auto punch-in/out.

5. After setting the level, locate to the beginning of

the program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: DISTORTION)

Effect types No.39 through 42 (shown in "Effect type list" on

page 49) are distortion types.

Details of each distortion type

Each distortion type (selectable for each of effect

types No.39 through 42) can apply the effect as de-

scribed below.

Each of these has 11 parameters as shown below.

• Distortion types for "L39: Gtr Dist"

The default distortion gain value depends on the

distortion type selected.

Default

Comment

Name

Dist Gain

Acoustic

You can get an electric-acoustic

guitar sound

Rhythm

You can get a slight distortion when

picking the guitar strongly.

Over Drive You can get a smooth distortion like

driving a tube amplifier.

Distortion

Blues

Fuzz

You can get a hard distortion like

driving a three-stacked amplifier.

Selects a distortion type.

You can get a fat overdrive sound.

Each effect type has following distortion

type options. (An underlined option is

the default.)

You can get a rough sound with a fat

low frequency range.

L39: Acous, Rythm, OvDrv, Dist, Blues, Fuzz,

1. DistType

Lead, Metal

L40: Bass1, Bass2, Bass3

L41: Kick, Snar1, Snar2

L42: Voic1,Voic2,Voic3

Lead

You can get a bright and smooth

distortion.

Metal

You can get a shred sound.

See the table on the right for details

about each type.

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected. See the table

on the right.)

2. Dist Gain

• Distortion types for "L40: Bass Dist"

Bass 1

Bass 2

Simulates a bass amplifier.

You can get a sound like recording a

distorted bass sound through a line.

Makes the sound warmer when On.

Options: ON, OFF (default: ON)

3.Warm

4. Bass

Bass 3

You can get a fat bass sound.

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

• Distortion types for "L41: Drum Dist"

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

5. Middle

Kick

You can distort a kick sound

appropriately.

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

Snar 1

Snar 2

You can distort a snar sound appropriately.

You can distort a snar sound excessively.

6.Treble

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

7. Noise Gate

• Distortion types for "L42:Voice Dist"

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

8. Out Level

Voic 1

Voic 2

Voic 3

You can get a smooth distortion.

You can get a boomy and bright distortion.

You can get a bullhorn sound.

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

9. DelayTime

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

10. Feedback

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

11. Delay Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: AMP SIMULATION)

Effect type No.43 (shown in "Effect type list" on page 49) is

the amp simulation type.

Details of each amplifier types

Five guitar amplifier types can be simulated.

Each amplifier type has its own unique character as

described below.

The default distortion gain value depends on the

amplifier type selected.

This effect type has 11 parameters as shown below.

Default

Comment

Name

Amp Gain

British 800 Amplifier

Simulates the 800-series British tube

amplifier, a synonym for "rock".

The king of the rock sound of the

80's hard rock and heavy metal.

Distorted raging sound.

Brit800

Tremo Rect Amplifier

Simulates the American combo

model amplifier, designed to get

high gain sound for the 90's hard

rock and heavy metal.

TremoRect

MetalRect

Fat bass and raging distorted sound.

Selects an amplifier type to be simulated.

Options: Brit800, TremoRect, MetalRect,

Metal Panel Recti Amplifier

1.Type

ClassA30, Fatman (default: Brit800)

See the table on the right for details

about each type.

Simulates the amp head of the high

gain amp series, same as the Tremo

Recti Amplifiers. Deep and well-sepa-

rated distortion and heavy sound.

Suitable for the metal sound.

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected. See the table

on the right.)

2. Amp Gain

British Class A 30 Amplifier

Simulates a most popular British

sound tube amplifier.

The preamp section is designed us-

ing the class A circuit for creating

the fat and warm sound.

Usually used in the range between

clear and crunch sound, but some-

times used with the higher gain to

get a harder distortion.

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

3. Bass

4. Middle

5.Treble

ClassA30

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

Fat Bass Amplifier

Simulates the American combo am-

plifier designed as a bass amplifier

but used by many guitarists because

of its fat presence sound.

Adjusts the presence (the feeling of be-

ing "up front").

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 0)

6. Presence

FatMan

Suitable for jazz and blues with its

clear and crunch sound, however,

because you can get a raging distor-

tion that you cannot expect from an

ordinary bass amplifier when rais-

ing the gain, It can be used for a wide

range of genres.

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

7. Noise Gate

8. Out Level

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: MIC SIMULATION)

Effect type No.44 (shown in "Effect type list" on page

49) is the mic simulation type.

This effect type has 3 parameters as shown below.

9. DelayTime

10. Feedback

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

11. Delay Level

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 3)

Selects a microphone input type.

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (3).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies.

Options: US Dyn 58 (dynamic type), MCon2

(condenser type)

Default: US Dyn 58

GDyn 421 LC3

GDyn 421 LC2

1. IN

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 2)

Selects a microphone output type to be simu-

lated.

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (2).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "GDyn 421 LC3".

Options: TCon3k, TCon3k LC, TCon414,

TCon414LC1,TCon414LC2,TDyn112, GDyn421,

GDyn421LC3, GDyn421LC2, GDyn421LC1,

GDyn421SPE, MCon1, MCon2, MConV, UsDyn58,

VCon47,VCon87,VCon87 LC

2. Out

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 1)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (1).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "GDyn 421 LC2".

Default:VCon87

See the next page for details.

GDyn 421 LC1

GDyn 421 SPE

Adjusts the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 0 to 99 (default: OFF)

3. Gate

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: SPE)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (SPE).

You can considerably suppress boosted low

frequencies. Suitable for a speech.

Sets the output level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

4. Out Level

Details of microphone output types

18 options are available for the microphone output

type, as shown below.

Modern Condenser 1

Simulates the sound of a modern con-

denser microphone which has a wider dy-

namic range and bright sound. It offers a

warm tube sound, making a vocal or acous-

tic guitar as if it were recorded by a con-

denser microphone.

MCon 1

Trad Condenser 3k (Low cut: Off)

Simulates the sound of a multipurpose

professional condenser microphone with

a large diaphragm.

TCon 3k

Its warm and transparent sound is suit-

able for a vocal, as well as a drum over-

head or guitar amplifier.

Modern Condenser 2

Simulates the sound of a condenser micro-

phone offering wide dynamic range, like

"MCon 1". It offers a flat frequency re-

sponse and natural sound.

MCon 2

MConV

Trad Condenser 3k (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 3k" above

with the Low Cut switch to On.

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

as a result from placing a microphone in

close proximity to the signal source.

TCon 3k LC

Modern Condenser V

Simulates the sound of a modern tube mi-

crophone with vintage feel.

It offers a deep and natural sound which

only tube microphones can provide.

Suitable for a vocal, piano and ensemble.

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of one of the most

popular condenser microphones in profes-

TCon 414

US Dynamic 58

Simulates the most popular dynamic hand-

held vocal microphone.

sional studios together with the Classic

condenser 87. You can get a high-fidelity

clean sound of an acoustic piano.

Us Dyn 58

VCon 47

VCon 87

High-end and low-end frequencies are not

extended as compared with a condenser

microphone.

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: 75 Hz)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 414" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (75 Hz).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies.

TCon 414 LC1

Vintage Condenser 47

Simulates a professional tube microphone

with a large diaphragm that offers clean

and dry sound.

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: 150 Hz)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 414" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (150 Hz).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "TCon 414LC1".

TCon 414 LC2

TDyn 112

Suitable for an acoustic guitar and brass.

Vintage Condenser 87 (Low cut: Off)

Simulates the sound of a classic and his-

toric model used for vocals and strings fre-

quently in professional studios.

Provides outstanding warm sound among

condenser microphones.

Trad Dynamic 112

Simulates the sound of a dynamic micro-

phone suitable for a kick.

You can get a clean and powerful sound

by applying it to a kick or bass.

It has a slightly boosted low frequencies.

Vintage Condenser 87 (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of "VCon 87" with low

cut "On".

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

as a result from placing a microphone in

close proximity to the signal source.

German Dynamic 421

Simulates the sound of a dynamic micro-

phone which is frequently used for record-

ing a tom-tom.

Suitable for recording a skin percussion

because of its powerful attack feeling with

a high frequency peak.

VCon 87 LC

GDyn 421

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Digital recording

You can digitally record an external digital source to the VF80EX, or stereo output signals of the VF80EX to an

external digital recorder. This section describes how to make digital recording between the VF80EX and an ex-

ternal digital device. Note that theVF80EX can only handle S/P DIF format digital data.

Recording an external source onto theVF80EX digitally

The following describes how to record an external S/P DIF digital source (such as CD, MD and DAT) onto the

VF80EX.

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

Selecting a track to record

• When recording a digital source onto the VF80EX, make

sure that the source signal is the "44.1 kHz, 16-bit" S/P

DIF digital format.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key ofTracks

7/8.

The key lighting in green change to flashing in red.

• You can record an external S/P DIF digital source only

onto Tracks 7/8 of the VF80EX. If you want to record

it onto other tracks, first record it onto Tracks 7/8 and

then move the data to other tracks using the track

exchange function.

Starting to record

Set theTrack 7/8 and Master faders to the "0" position.

Start recording of theVF80EX by pressing the [PLAY]

key while holding down the [RECORD] key, and start

playback of the external digital device.

Selecting a program to be recorded

Whenmorethanoneprogramexists, selectthedesired

program using the program select function before re-

cording.

See "Selecting a program" in "Recorder function" about

how to select a program.

"When recording a digital signal, you cannot adjust the

input level of the VF80EX." "To get the optimum re-

cording level, adjust the output level of the source."

The level meters for Tracks 7/8 on the screen shows

the input levels.

<Note>

During digital recording, the level meters for the

stereo outputs (L and R) are not active.

Selecting the digital input

In the "Digital In" menu of the setup mode,select "On."

Rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise to monitor the

source sound.

See "Setting digital input" in "Setup mode" about how to

select "On."

When set to "On", you can record an incoming S/P DIF

signal from the [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector onto

Track 7/8 of the VF80EX.

After finishing recording, stop theVF80EX by press-

ing the [STOP] key , as well as stop the external digital

device.

After setting "Digital In" menu,press the [EXIT/NO] key

to exit the setup mode.

<Note>

When receiving a correct S/P DIF digital signal, "DIGI

IN" is shown steadily on the screen. When a correct

digital signal is not received, "DIGI IN" blinks on the

screen. In such a case, check the connection and set-

tings of the external source device.

After you have finished the digital recording, return

the "Digital In" setting to "Off."

When "On", you cannot record any analog signal

onto Tracks 7/8.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Recording theVF80EX stereo output signals digitally onto an external digital device

You can record the stereo output signal digitally onto an external digital device via the [S/P DIF/DATA OUTPUT]

connector.

You do not have to carry out any special operation for outputting an S/P DIF digital signal from the [S/P DIF/

DATA OUTPUT] connector, because it is always output there.

All you have to do for mixing down to an external digital device digitally is to connect the device to the [S/

P DIF/DATA OUTPUT] connector. You can perform the digital mixdown during the mixdown process described

in "Mixdown" of the "Basic recording/playback" chapter as well as in the mastering mode described in "Master-

ing mode" of this chapter.

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

MIDI clock sync system

By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the VF80EX, and

by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting, a hardware type MIDI sequencer

can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this system, the VF80EX will be the master and the

MIDI sequencer the slave.

MIDI clock & song position ponter

MIDI IN

MIDI Sound Source

INPUT

ST OUT L, R

MIDI OUT

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

Master Recorder

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

MUTE

PLAY

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

MIDI Sequencer

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Set the MIDI sequencer for“external sync mode

Connecting external equipment

(EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock.”

Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use

for details.

Connect theVF80EX MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI

sequencer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Executing of recording

Setup of theVF80EX

Various ways of recording can be conducted while

synchronizing the VF80EX and the MIDI sequencer

with the MIDI clock.

Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will

be output from theVF80EX,set the SETUP mode“MIDI

sync signal output setting”to“CLK.”

Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output

setting” for correct operating procedures.

Confirming the MIDI clock sync

During recording and at playback following the

recording,thetimebase(BAR/BEAT/CLK)isdisplayed

in accordance to the setup tempo map, and the MIDI

clock and song position pointer is also output.

Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of

the VF80EX and the travel position of the

synchronized MIDI sequencer are matched.

The meter in the desired bar can be set by “Time

signature setting”of the SETUP mode.

Refer to page “134”, SETUP mode “Time Signature Setting”

for operating procedure.

Tempo in the desired bar can be set by“Tempo setting”

of the SETUP mode.

Refer to page “136”, SETUP mode “Tempo Setting” for

operating procedure.

If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the

connections/cables and setting of both equipment.

Set the SETUP mode“Metronome setting”to“On” if

click sound is to be output according to the setup

<Note>

In the VF80EX, the “ABS 0” position is set at “-002BAR/

1BEAT /00CLK.” This setting is made in consideration of

the time required (it will not sync immediately) for the

MIDI sequencer, etc. to enter into sync. As a result, if the

VF80EX is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync

will be completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and

will thus synchronize from head of the tune.

tempo map.

Refer to page “137”, SETUP mode “Metronome setting” for

operating procedure.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the

time base display to BAR/BEAT/CLK.

MTC sync/MIDI machine control system

The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output and the computer controlling

system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this system, the VF80EX will be the master and the computer (with

sequence software) will be the slave. The VF80EX will attach any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time

(absolute time) and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate. It can also carry out the proper operation upon

receiving an MMC from outside. In this case, because the VF80EX can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP

mode “MIDI Device ID Setting” menu, a multiple number of the VF80EX’s can be separately controlled by changing

the DEVICE ID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer.

MMC

MIDI IN

MIDI Sound Source

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT L, R

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

Master Recorder

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

Computer System

with

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

MMC/MTC software

7/8 2TRK MASTER

CURSOR

MIDI OUT

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Connecting to external equipment

By “MTC offset time setting”and “MTC offset mode setting,”

at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK)

should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be output

is set. When setting the start time of the tune in the

sequence software by these setups, be careful of the

following points.

Connect theVF80EX MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with

MIDI interface) MIDI IN/OUT.

MMC/MTC complied sequence software is activated in

the computer.

• Offset mode: For ABS

Setup of external equipment

If playback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be

output starting from the MTC offset time that has been

set, thestarttimeofthetunesetbythesequencesoftware

must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset

time that was setup. This will provide time because the

sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC

is output. For example, if the initial setting of “00h 59m

57s 00f 00sf”is used, set the start time of the tune to “01h

00m 00s 00f.”

Setup the following in the sequence software.

* Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC).

* Set for output of MMC.

* Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate.

* Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first

bar). Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset, farther

on.

If playback is thus started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0),

sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar

and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of

the tune.

For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external

equipment.

Setup of theVF80EX

• Offset mode: For BAR

As mentioned before, because the “ABS 0”position is set

at the “002BAR / 1BEAT / 00CLK”position, the setup MTC

offset time can be set to the head of the tune without

taking into account the time until reaching sync, as

mentioned above. The length of the time two bars

beforehand will change in accordance to the first bar

setting for “signature”and “tempo.” For example, it will

be long if the tempo is set slow. This mode can be

effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC

in parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while

controlling the recorder with time base BAR/BEAT/CLK.

Because MTC will be output from theVF80EX, set to

“MTC” the SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output

setting.”

Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output

setting” for operating procedure.

Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode “MTC

offset time setting.”

Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode“MTC offset time setting”

for operating procedure.

IntheSETUPmode“MTCoffsetmodesetting,”whether

the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output

(ABS) at the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or at the

001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar, signature) must be

Confirming MTC sync/MMC

During recording and at playback after recording,time

baseMTCisdisplayedaccordingtothesettingandMTC

selected.

is output at the same time.

Refertopage“139”,SETUPmode“MTCoffsetmodesetting”

for operating procedure.

Check that the VF80EX traveling position (MTC) and the

traveling position of the sequence software in sync are

matched.

Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the

sequence software by“MTC Frame rate setting”of the

SETUP mode.

Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and

LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the

VF80EX will be properly controlled.

WhenacorrectMIDIcommand(MMCorFEX)isreceived,

“MIDI” in the display will be lit for about 40msec.

There is no setting in the VF80EX to receive MMC but it

will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input.

Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC

device number by the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID

setting.”

When the sequence software transmits by “7F,”it means

“ALL DEVICE” and therefore, it need not be setup.

Refer to page “143”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting”

for operating procedure and details.

If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check

connections/cables and the setting of both equipment.

Execution of recording

Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the

VF80EX and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the

time base display to MTC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode

Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the VF80EX as the master

and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting, the MIDI equipment can be set as the

master and the VF80EX as the slave.

MTC

Sound Source

MIDI IN

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

MIX PARAMETER

SCENE SCENE SEQ.

TRACK

EDIT

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

MIDI OUT

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

MUTE

PLAY

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

Computer System

with

MMC/MTC software

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

Set slave mode to “On” by the SETUP mode “Slave

mode setting.”

Refer to page “140”, SETUP mode “Slave mode setting” for

operating procedure and details.

Connection to external equipment

ConnectMIDIOUTofthecomputer(withMIDIinterface)

with MIDI IN of theVF80EX.

The computer sequence software complying to MMC/

MTC must be activated.

Set slave type to“Vari”by the SETUP mode“Slave type

setting.”

Refer to page “140”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting” for

operating procedure and details.

Setup of external equipment

Sequence software is setup as follows.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, to change the time

base display to MTC.

* Set for output of MTC.

* Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.

* Confirm start time of the tune.

Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment

for details.

Confirming chase lock

When the sequence software is played, “CHASE”and

“MTC”in the display will be light and the chase lock

Setup of theVF80EX

will be completed.

Check that the MTC output by the sequence software

and MTC time displayed in the VF80EX are the same.

Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the

SETUP mode“MTC Frame rate setting.”

Refer to page“138”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting”

for operating procedure and details.

When the sequence software stops, MTC will be

interrupted and theVF80EX will also stop.

“CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking.

Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode “MTC

offset mode setting.”

Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode

setting” for operating procedure and details.

During FF/REW of the sequence software,theVF80EX

will remain stopped but upon starting to record, the

VF80EX will immediately chase lock.

Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check

connections / cables and all settings.

A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode

“MTC offset time setting.”

Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Execution of recording

<Notes>

• Chase lock of the VF80EX by MTC only is permissible

when speed difference of the MTC from the master is

within +/- 5.6%.

Carry out various recordings while the recorder is

chase locked to the sequence software.

Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch will

be constantly applied internally for chasing. Chase

lock, however, will not function against MTC at a speed

difference outside this range. Also, when the master

speed difference is large, it is advised to let the VF80EX

learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to

recording. By doing so, it will be lock faster from the

second and later sessions.

Theposition(ABS0or001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK)whenthe

setup MTC (MTC offset time) should be output was setup

by the “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode

setting.” In accordance to start time of the tune set by

the sequence software, setup as explained below.

• Normally, when “Setup of slave type” is set to “Vari,”

the VF80EX will be constantly controlled by vari-pitch

and follow the MTC, which is the master.

However, if the digital input is set to “On”via the SETUP

mode “Setup of digital input”, it will be in “Word clock

external sync operation” by the digital signal (S/P DIF)

that is input.

Therefore, it must be noted that when “Setup of digital

input”is executed, even though “Setup of slave type”is

set to “Vari”, it will not follow by application of vari-

pitch and upon completion of lock, it will change to

external sync operation by the digital input signal.

Offset mode: For ABS

Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the

start time of the tune set by the sequence software.

Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock

after input of MTC, in order to sync the unit from head

of the tune, set the preroll using the sequence software,

and playback from before the actual head of the tune to

allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives

at the head of the tune.

Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT

The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the

start time of the tune set by the sequence software.

Because the “ABS 0”position is set at the “002BAR/1BEAT/

00CLK” position in the unit, as mentioned before, the

preceding time required for sync is already set.

The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in

length depending on the first bar’s “signature setting”and

“tempo setting” mentioned before. For example, it will

be longer if the tempo is slowed down.

Sync signal“Vari” of the“Slave mode setting” menu:

When the VF80EX is made to chase lock by MTC only,

variable pitch will be constantly applied by external

MTC. If a digital signal is output to an external digital

equipment from the VF80EX, it will not be able to follow

the speed difference (MTC speed difference of the

master) of the VF80EX and the external digital

equipment, in some cases, may not be able to input a

continuous digital signal.

As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to

“Free” by the “Slave mode setting” menu. Using this

setting, the VF80EX will enter self operation by the

internal clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will

bepossibletosupplyastabledigitalsignaltotheexternal

equipment.

Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master

recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames, the

VF80EX will assume that chase lock has been disengaged

and the slave recorder will carry out position matching

again with the master unit (re-chase operation).

During the re-chase operation, sound output will be

muted and the digital signal will also be interrupted.

If it is within 10 frames, the slave recorder will continue

to run while admitting this drift.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Chain play function

The chain play function allows you to play back programs in order according to the "chain play list". As

examples in figure 1, you can play back programs in order of program number or in desired order.

Program 4

Program 2

Program 3

Program 8

Program 1

playing back in program order

playing back in random order

Program 5

figure 1

You can play the whole (i.e. from ABS 0 to REC END) of each program in the chain play list as shown in figure

2, as well as a desired part(*) of each program as shown in figure 3.

<Note>

A desired part can be specified as a range between the START and END points. Therefore, if a program does not

have both the START and END points which are correctly set, the whole program (from ABS 0 to REC END) is

played back.

END

point

START

point

ABS 0

REC END

Program 1

Program 5

START

point

END

point

REC END

Program 5

Program 8

Program 4

ABS 0

REC END

Program 8

START

point

END

point

REC END

Program 4

figure 2

In addition, you can select a playback mode for the chain play function from among "Pause", "A. Play" and

"Repeat" (see below for details about each mode).

In this mode, the VF80EX plays back each program in the chain play list one by one.

Pause

A. Play

Repeat

Each time the VF80EX finishes playback of a program, it automatically pauses at the start point of the next

program. Pressing the [PLAY] key starts playback.

In this mode, the VF80EX plays back all programs in the chain play list continuously.

After finishing playback of the last program, the VF80 pauses at the start point of the first program. Pressing

the [PLAY] key again starts playback of all programs in the chain play list continuously.

In this mode, the VF80EX plays back all programs in the chain play list continuously and repeatedly until you

press the [STOP] key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

By rotating the [JOG] dial while "END" is flashing, you

can select a desired option from among the programs

on the drive ("P01" through "P10"), as well as "ALL",

"INS" and "DEL". See the table below for details about

each option.

Making the chain play list

Before executing chain play, you must make the

chain play list by selecting the desired (or all) pro-

grams in the desired order. You can enter up to 99

programs to the chain play list.

The current and succeeding steps in the chain

play list are all deleted. (See "Deleting all programs

from the chain play list" described later for de-

tails.)

END

The following procedure examples show how to en-

ter all programs on the VF80EX current drive and

how to select desired five programs to the list, as-

suming that 10 programs are recorded on the

VF80EX current drive.

All programs on the current drive are entered to

the chain play list. Note that you can select "ALL"

to step 1 (C01) only. There is no "ALL" option on

ALL

other steps. (See "Making the chain play list by

While the VF80EX is stopped, press the [SETUP] key.

selecting all the programs" described later for

details.)

The VF80EX enters the setup mode and the display

changes to show the "Select Menu" screen for selecting

a setup menu item.

A desired program can be added (inserted) to the

current step. (See "Inserting a program to the chain

play list" described later for details.)

By default, the "Signature Set" flashes as shown in the

figure below.

INS

The program on the current step is deleted. (See

"Deleting a program from the chain play list" de-

scribed later for details.)

DEL

A desired program is entered to the current step.

If another program is already entered, the new

program overwrites it. You can select any of the

programs on the current drive. (See "Making the

chain play list by selecting desired programs" de-

scribed later for details.)

P01

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR ] key) to select

"Chain Play List" which is the 27th menu item (R27) in

Pnn

the setup menu, and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display changes to show the "Chain Play List"

screen, in which "C01:END" is highlighted by default.

"C01" shows the step number, while "END" shows no

program is entered to the chain play list.

Making the chain play list by selecting all the programs

The following procedure example shows how to en-

ter all the programs (P01 through P10) on the cur-

rent drive to the chain play list.

While "END" is flashing, rotate the [JOG] dial to se-

lect "ALL", and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

By rotating the [JOG] dial to the left, you can find "ALL"

easily.

By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting "ALL",

all programs on the current drive are entered to the

chain play list, as shown in the screen example below.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

"END" starts flashing and you can now enter a desired

program to step 01.

By rotating the [JOG] dial (or using the [CURSOR

]

keys), you can scroll through the list to check the chain

play list. In the last line on the list, "C11: END" is shown,

which shows that no more program is entered after

step 11.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR ] key) to high-

The chain play list is made and the "Chain Play List"

screen is dismissed. The display returns to the "Select

Menu" screen, where the current option of the "Chain

Play" menu item flashes (by default, "Off" flashes) and

you can now set the chain play mode.

light "C02: END" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

As with procedure step 1) above, "END" of "C02: END"

starts flashing.

For details about how to set the chain play mode, see

"Setting the chain play mode" on page xx.

<Note>

If a program which participates in the chain play list is

deleted from the drive (see page 62 "Deleting a program"

in the owner's manual), the whole play list is cleared

(it returns to show "C01: END").

For example, if you are going to delete program 5 while

programs 1 through 10 are entered to the chain play

list, the warning message, "[WARNING] Play List Deleted",

is shown on the display. Deleting program 11, for ex-

ample, which does not participate the chain play list

does not affect the chain play list.

While "END" is flashing on the screen,rotate the [JOG]

dial to select "P03" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

As with procedure step 1) above, program 3 (P03) is

set to step 2 (C02) of the chain play list and the screen

changes as shown below.

Making the chain play list by selecting desired programs

The following procedure example shows how to en-

ter the five desired programs (from among 10 pro-

grams on the current drive) to steps 1 through 5 in

the chain play list, as below.

: C01 -> program 5 (P05)

: C02 -> program 3 (P03)

: C03 -> program 1 (P01)

: C04 -> program 2 (P02)

: C05 -> program 4 (P04)

Set programs to steps 3 through 5 (C03 through C05)

of the chain play list with the same manner as above.

While "END" is flashing on the screen, rotate the [JOG]

dial to select "P05" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You can select the desired program by rotating the

[JOG] dial to the right.

After completing setting all the desired programs to

the chain play list, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The chain play list is made and the "Chain Play List"

screen is dismissed. The display returns to the "Select

Menu" screen, where the current option of the "Chain

Play" menu item flashes (by default, "Off" flashes) and

you can now set the chain play mode.

When selecting the program, the first nine characters

of the program name is also shown (in the example

below, the name is "#0005").

After selecting "P05" and pressing the [ENTER/YES] key,

program 5 (P05) is set to step 1 (C01) of the chain

play list and the screen changes as shown below.

For details about how to set the chain play mode,

see "Setting the chain play mode" on next page.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Setting the chain play mode

•

When the chain play mode is set to any option but

“Off”, you cannot make the auto punch mode or loop

mode active. If you are going to make either of them

active, “[WARNING]Void! Chain Play”is shown and the

operation is invalid.

When you have made the chain play list, set the chain

play mode. The following procedure shows how to set

the chain play mode after making the chain play list

as described before.

•

When setting the chain play mode to “Repeat”and

exiting the setup mode, the recorder automatically

starts playback from the start point (the ABS 0 or

START point) of the first program in the chain list.

(When setting the chain play mode to “Pause”or

“A. Play” and exiting the setup mode, the recorder

moves to the beginning of the first program in the

chain list.

While“OFF”which is the current option of the“Chain

Play”mode setting is flashing on the screen,rotate the

[JOG] dial to select a desired chain play mode option.

You can select a chain play mode option from among

“Pause”, “A. Play” and “Repeat”, besides “Off”. See page

97 for details about each chain play mode option.

•

When the chain play mode is set to any option but

“Off”, you can change the current program (by

[SHIFT] + [TRACK EDIT/PGM]) only from among the

programs set to the chain play list (see “Selecting a

program from the chain play list”on page 8).

When the play mode is set to any option but “Off”, the

recorder immediately locates to the start point of the

programsettostep1(C01)intheplaylist, andthenstops.

If you move the recorder to a position out of the range

between the START and END points (or after the REC END

point), “Out of Zone”is shown instead of the step number.

In such a condition, the recorder does not correctly

execute chain play. The worst case is that you start chain

play when the recorder position is after the END point

(or the REC END point). The recorder never moves to the

next program.

<Notes>

To move the recorder to the start point of a program,

reselect a program you want to start chain play from by

following the procedure described below.

•

The chain play mode setting returns to the default

setting (“Off”) when turning off the power or

executing play list editing (described later).

Therefore, each time you want to carry out chain play

after turning on the power or executing play list

editing, you must set the chain play mode.

Selecting a program in the chain play list

•

If you are going to set the chain play mode while the

chain play list has not been made, “[WARNING] Illegal

Play List!”is shown and the setting is invalid.

If the play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you can

select a program only from those set to the chain play

list. By selecting a program, you can start chain play

from the desired step in the chain play list.

After selecting the desired option, press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

The chain play mode is set to the selected option, while

the setup mode exits and the display shows the start

point (the ABS 0 or START point) of the program set to

step 1 (“C01”) in the chain play list. The following shows

the screen example of setting the chain play mode to

“A. Play”.

<Note>

If you want to select any program on the disk, as usual,

turnoffthepowerandthenon, orsetthechainplaymode

to “Off”(see“Setting the chain play mode”).

Inthefollowingprocedure, itisassumedthatthechain

play list has been made, the play mode is set to an

option but “Off”, and the program set to the first step

of the chain play list is loaded.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

This example shows that program 1 (P01) is set to step

1 (C01) and the start point isABS 0. If the STARTand END

points are set, the time at the START point is shown.

The screen changes as below to show the current chain

play list.shows that the list continues under the screen

you see now.

By pressing the [PLAY] key while the screen above is

shown, chain playback starts in the selected chain play

mode according to the chain play list.

While this screen is shown, you can select the desired

program by using the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys).

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Editing the chain play list

You can replace a program in the chain play list with

another program, delete a program from the list, or

add a new program to the list.

Deleting (or replacing) a program in the chain play list

You can delete a desired program from the chain play

list or replace a program in the list with another

program by following the procedure below.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select the

to enter the setup mode.

desired step and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The program set to the selected step is loaded and the

recorderisstoppedatthebeginningoftheprogram(ABS

0), while the display shows the Normal screen.

In the screen examples below, program 4 (P04) set to

step 4 (C04) is selected.

The screen for selecting a menu item in the setup mode

appears.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select

“Chain Play List”, and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The display changes to shows the“Chain Play List” screen

as below.

Instead of pressing the [ENTER/YES] key in the procedure

above, you may press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select the

step you want to edit, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The program number set to the selected step starts

flashing.

In the example below,“P03” which is set to step 3 (C03)

is flashing.

As described above, by selecting a program while the

chain play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you can

start chain play from the desired program.

Usethe[JOG]dialtoselect“DEL”(oradesiredprogram)

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

To delete the program from the chain play list, select

“DEL”. To replace the program with another program,

select a desired program.

If you delete the program from the list, all the programs

set to the subsequent steps automatically slide up, as

shown below.

Deleting all programs from the chain play list

You can delete all the program in the chain play list

simultaneously.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key

to enter the setup mode.

The screen for selecting a menu item in the setup mode

appears.

While step 1 (C01) is highlighted (selected), press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The program number set to step 1 (C01) starts flashing.

If step 1 (“C01”) is not highlighted, use the [JOG] dial

(or the [CURSOR] keys) to select step 1 and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

If you select a desired program, the program set to the

selected step is replaced and other steps are not affected

(in the following example, “P03” set to “C03” is replaced

with “P08”).

Use the [JOG] dial to select “END” and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

All the programs in the list are deleted at once and the

screen shows as below (“C01: END” is shown in the chain

play list, which means no program is entered to the list).

To delete (or replace) another program, repeat the

procedure shown above.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit the “Chain Play List”

screen.

The display returns to the “Select Menu” screen where

the current option of the “Chain Play” mode setting is

flashing.

<Note>

If you delete or replace a program in the chain play list

when “Chain Play”is set to any option but “Off”, the “Chain

Play”setting automatically changes to “Off”(which is the

default).

Therefore, to execute chain play after editing the chain

play list, you must make the “Chain Play”mode setting

appropriately again.

<Note>

If you select any step but “C01”in procedure step 2) above

andfollowprocedurestep3), programssettotheselected

and subsequent steps are deleted from the list.

For example, if you set “END”to step 3 (C03) in the chain

play list where ten steps are currently set, programs set

to steps 3 through 10 are all deleted, while programs set

to steps 1 and 2 remain.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until the setup

mode exits.

The“Chain Play”mode setting is automatically changed

to “Off”.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

Inserting a program to the chain play list

You can insert a program to a desired step in the

current chain play list.

<Note>

You can enter up to 99 programs to the play list. If you

are trying to enter a program to tyhe play list where 99

programs are already registered, “Void! Play List is Full” is

shown and the operation is canceled.

Follow procedure steps 1) and 2) on page 9 to show the

“Chain Play List”screen.

(i.e. enter the setup mode and select “Chain Play List”.)

If you want to insert a program to another step, repeat

the same procedure above.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select a

step where you want to add a program and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

After inserting all desired programs, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

The“Chain Play List”screen is dismissed and the display

returns to the“Select Menu” screen where the current

option of the “Chain Play” mode setting is flashing.

The program number set to the selected step starts

flashing. If you select “C02” on the left screen example

below, “P02” starts flashing.

<Note>

If you insert the desired program(s) to the chain play

list when the “Chain Play” mode is set to any option

but “Off”, the “Chain Play” setting automatically

changes to“Off”(the default).

Therefore, to execute chain play after editing the

chain play list, you must set the“Chain Play”mode

appropriately again.

Aftersettingthe“ChainPlay”modeappropriately,press

the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until exiting the setup

mode.

Usethe[JOG]dialtoselect“INS”andpressthe[ENTER/

YES] key.

You can now select a program to be inserted. Initially,

“P01” flashes.

As you can see by comparing the two screen examples

above, the programs set to the second and subsequent

steps slide down automatically.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a program to be inserted,

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Intheexampleshownbelow, program6(P06)isinserted

to step 2.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Operations (VF80EX)

Audio CD playback mode

By switching the playback mode from the “internal HDD playback mode” to the “audio CD playback mode”, you

can play back audio CDs created by the VF80EX (or commercially available audio CDs) using the built-in CD-R/

RW drive.

<Notes>

•

You cannot play back an audio CD which is copy-protected.

Never try to play back a disc which is not an audio CD (CD-DA). This may damage the VF80EX.

In the audio CD playback mode, you can use functions such as locate, scrub, loop and effect editing, as with

internal HDD playback. However, note that the access speed is not guaranteed.

Available functions in the audio CD playback mode

Switching the playback mode

In the audio CD playback mode, the following

functions are available.

When turning the power on, the VF80EX always starts

up in the internal HDD playback mode. In the

following description, it is assumed that the optional

CD-R/RWdriveisinstalledtotheVF80EXandanaudio

CD (burned using the VF80EX or on the market) is

inserted to the drive.

In the audio CD playback mode, only the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys for tracks 1, 2 and

[MASTER] are lit, while the other [TRACK STATUS/

TRACK SEL] keys are unlit, showing that only the

faders for track 1, 2 and [MASTER] are effective.

•WhentheHDDisstopped,pressthe[WAVEFORMSCRUB/

CD PLAY] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

After the associated warning message as shown below

appears, the playback mode changes Executing the above

operation alternatively switches the playback mode.

This means that the playback level of the audio CD is

adjustedusingthefadersfortracks1, 2and[MASTER].

If you are going to carry out any function other than the

following, a warning message is shown and the operation

is ignored (for example, if you press the [AUTO PUNCH]

key, “[WARNING!]Void Key CD PLAYER” is shown.

When switching the playback mode, make sure that the

VF80EX is not accessing the CD-R/RW disc.

•

Normal playback

[SHIFT] key

You can play back an audio CD with the same

manneraswithaprogramintheinternalHDD. You

can control the playback level using the faders for

tracks 1, 2 and [MASTER].

SHIFT

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

[WAVE FORM SCRUB/CD

PLAY] key

MARK

DELETE

CD PLAY

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

<Note>

If you press the [PLAY] key, the key indicator flashes

for a while. This shows that the system is in

preparation for audio CD playback. When it is ready,

playback starts.

Audio CD playback mode

Internal HDD playback mode

Audio CD playback mode

•

Track skip

If an audio CD contains more than one track,

pressing [LOCATE >>I ] or [LOCATE I<< ] key skips

a track.

By pressing the key, “Locate:MARK**” (** shows the

mark number) is shown on the display, and the

playback position skips (locates) to the beginning

of the appropriate track.

•

Loop function

By storing the loop start and end points correctly,

you can use the loop playback function (which

repeats playback between the specified points).

For details about the loop function, see page 59

in the owner’s manual.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AdvancedOperations(VF80EX)

•

Varipitch playback

•

Audio CD eject

You can use the varipitch playback function which

allows to alter the playback speed within +/- 6.0 %

range in 0.1 % increments/decrements.

In the audio CD playback mode and when the

VF80EX is not accessing the disc, you can eject a

disc in the CD-R/RW drive by pressing the [EXIT/

NO] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key (or

pressing the eject key on the CD-R/RW drive).

For details about the varipitch function, see

page 58 in the owner’s manual.

Display time mode selection

Effect, EQ and pan controls

You can use the effect, EQ and pan controls for

tailoring the playback sound.

By pressing the [TIME BASE SEL] key, you can select

the time mode on the display from among “ABS”,

“Track” and “MTC”.

For details about the effect function, see pages

37 and 45 in the owner’s manual.

For details about the EQ function, see pages 37

and 42 in the owner’s manual.

For details about the pan control, see pages 37

and 41 in the owner’s manual.

Note that, in the internal HDD playback mode, the

time mode can be selected from among “ABS”,

“Bar/Beat” and “MTC”.

See the below for details about the time display.

• Display in the audio CD playback mode

When switching to the audio CD playback mode, the display looks like the example below.

Each press of the [TIME BASE SEL] key switches the display time mode among “ABS”, “Track” and

“MTC”, and the associated time information is shown. See the table below for details about each

time mode.

This section shows the current track number and name. In this example,

“CD01” shows the current track number is “01”. On the right of the track

number, the track name is shown when playing back a CD TEXT disc (an

audio CD containing text information) which has track title information. If

the name is long and exceeds the display area, it is scrolled in the next

row.

In the audio CD playback mode, only the level meters for

tracks1, 2andL/Rmasterareeffective.Theplaybacklevel

can be controlled using the faders for tracks 1, 2 and

[MASTER].

When playing back a normal audio CD (which does not contain text

information) available on the market or burned using the VF80, “No Title”

is shown, as this example.

If the current audio CD has more than one track, pressing [LOCATE ] or

[LOCATE ] key skips a track and locates to the beginning of an appropriate

track, while “Locate: MARK**” is shown on the display.

Disc elapsed time is shown. The time starts from the beginning of a disc. The loop start and end points refers to disc

elapsed time.

ABS

TRACK

MTC

Track elapsed time is shown. Track time starts from the beginning of each track. Naturally, at the point each track starts

playback, the display shows “00m00s”.

MTC (MIDI Time Code) is shown. It has an offset of 59 minutes 57 seconds to “ABS 0” (the same offset as the internal HDD

playback mode).

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Save/Load of song data

You can save or load song data (including audio and setup data) using a digital audio recorder via the S/P DIF

digital signal, as well as using the CD-R/RW drive (Model CD-1A/EX).

This function allows you to save finished or unfinished song data to a digital recorder or the CD-R/RW drive,

and load the data later.

******About song data******

There are two methods of saving/loading song data depending on the digital signals used to handle the

data, which are S/PDIF digital and CD-R/RW drive. The data format and time required for the save/load

operations are different between each method.

•Using the S/PDIF digital signal (you can save/load data for each program individually.):

Following to five seconds of the pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), the song data is output to an

external digital audio device such as a DAT recorder.

The audio data is divided into data blocks of track pairs (shown in black in the diagram below) and transferred.

To save data for Real tracks 1 through 8, 4 two-track data are transferred. To save all tracks including the Additional

tracks in addition to the Real tracks, 12 two-track data are transferred. Therefore, it will take about 4 times as much

as the recorded time of a program (from ABS 0 to REC END) to save the Real tracks 1 through 8 of the program, while

it will take about 12 times to save all the data including the Additional tracks.

When loading song data from the external device to the VF80EX via the S/PDIF digital signal, data is transferred with

two-track data blocks, as with the same way as saving data from the VF80EX to the external device. (See also <Notes>

on the next page.)

Trk 23&24

Trk 3&4

Trk 21&22

Trk 1&2

Program 2 (P02)

Program 1 (P01)

Program 99 (P99)

•Using a CD-RW/CD-R disc (you can save/load data for each program individually.):

When using a CD-RW/CD-R discs, all audio data including both the Real and Additional tracks (shown in black in

the diagram below) is transferred simultaneously. Therefore, you can save or load a program much faster than

using the S/PDIF signal. Note that no pilot tone or beep sound is recorded when saving data to a CD-RW/CD-R discs.

If song data to be saved requires more space than the available disk space, you can save the data to more than one

disk (up to 99 disks). You can also save/load data by the WAV file format. In the save/load operation using the

WAV file, you can specify any track(s) to be saved or loaded, as well as all tracks.

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

Program 2 (P02)

Program 1 (P01)

Program 99 (P99)

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

•Memory data:

AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT data and Start/End/To points,

Scene memories 00 through 99, Marks 00 through 99 (only can be saved/loaded using CD-R/RW drive)

•Timebase:

ABS, MTC or BAR/BEAT/CLK

•Setup mode:

Bar/beat setting, tempo setting, metronome on/off, preroll time, MIDI synchronization output signal

setting, MTC offset time, MTC offset mode, REC protect setting, slave mode on/off, and slave type setting

Fader fix mode setting, fader recall mode setting

•On/off settings for auto play mode and auto return mode

•Vari pitch on/off and pitch data

•Setup mode:

DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT settings, bar/beat resolution on/off setting, device ID setting and drive

select setting

Saving/loading data using the S/PDIF digital signal

The VF80EX song data only can be saved to or loaded from digital recorders that can handle 16 bit, 44.1

kHz linear digital data with S/PDIF format (such as DAT recorders).

When saving all data including both real and Additional track data using the S/PDIF digital signal, note the

following.

Only the data recorded within the time duration between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved.

Therefore, if the recorded time of Additional tracks is longer than the Real tracks, only the Additional track data

within the time duration between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved.

In the example shown on the right, the Additional

tracks have data from "00m 00s" to "10m 00s", while

the Real tracks have data from "00m 00s" to "07m 00s".

Real Tracks

If you are going to save all tracks, the Additional track

data from "00m 00s" to "07m 00s" will be saved but

the rest will not be saved.

Save

In such a case, you can solve the problem by setting

DAT

the time length of saved data to 10 minutes by using

the "Save Length" screen mentioned later (see "step

Additional

Tracks

4" on page 109). Note that the maximum save length

is 59 minutes 59 seconds.

The other way to solve the problem is to exchange

the Additional track data and the Real track data

before saving data. You should be careful not to lose

the Additional track data in this operation. See page

68 about the "track exchange operation".

seven minutes

REC END (10m 00s)

of additional track

REC END (07m 00s)

of real track

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Saving data using the S/PDIF digital signal

You can save data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] (coaxial) jack.

• Use an external digital recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF80EX),

Connecting to an external digital recorder

Saving data

Connect the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] jack to the digital

You can save data via the "Save PGM" menu in the

setup mode.

input jack of the external digital recorder (DAT, etc.).

<Note>

• Output signal options: S/PDIF and IDE (CD-R/RW drive)

• Program options:

• Track options:

* When using S/PDIF:

Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24

or Tracks 17-24.

P01 to P99 (an individual Program)

Do not do anything, such as unplug the connecting

cable, that interrupts the digital signal until the saving

operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may

generates a noise which damages an external recorder.

VF80EX

* When using IDE (CD-R/RW drive):

All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks

individually when saving by the WAV file format).

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

INPUT

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. "IDE" flashes.

Digital equipment

• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital

input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use

the optional COP-1/96k (optical/coaxial converter).

• Do not connect digital signals for both directions

between the VF80EX and the external recorder (i.e.

the digital output of the VF80EX to the digital input

of the external recorder and the digital output of the

external recorder to the digital input of the VF80EX),

which may form a digital loop and cause feedback.

Setting the external recorder

Flashing

Set the sampling frequency to 44.1 kHz (the same as

the VF80EX).

Set the input source to "digital input" to accept the

signal from the VF80EX.

Some machine also needs to select the clock reference

to "external" when setting the input source to "digital

input". See the operation manual of the machine for

the detailed information.

• "IDE" should be selected when saving or loading data via

CD-RW/CD-R.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to select

"SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the program

to be saved.

The program number currently selected flashes, while

the data size of the program is shown.

While a program number is flashing, you can select

the desired program to be saved.

<Note>

If you cannot hear the input signal or you hear

digital noise when monitoring the source signal of

the external digital recorder, check the connections,

cables and settings of both the VF80EX and the

external recorder.

• See the operation manual of the external recorder for the

detailed information.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

<Note>

When you save tracks including Additional tracks,

read <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF digital

signal> on page 107 before executing the save

operation.

Flashing

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key

again.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to be saved

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows "Rec Start Recorder!" together with

the program and tracks to be saved, and "Sure?"

flashes. If you are sure to start saving data to the

recorder, go on to the next step.

The display shows the "Save Length" screen.

Initially, the recorded time length of the selected

program (ABS 00 to REC END) is shown as the time

length of data saving. Normally you do not need to

edit the length but you may edit it to the desired value

if needed.

Flashing

After checking all preparations on the external

recorder are made, start it recording.

It may be a good idea to put a Start-ID (for DAT) or

set a locate memory at the starting position so that

you can easily find the position when you load the

data later.

For example, if the actual recorded time is 9 min. 00

sec., you can make the length of the data to be saved

shorter or longer than 9 min. 00 sec., as long as the

length does not exceed 59 min.59 sec.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key immediately after the

external recorder starts recording.

The initially displayed value here is the length of the

Real track, therefore, as noted earlier, you may edit

the value to match the length of the Additional track

if it is longer.

The display shows something like the one below. After

a few seconds, the unit starts saving the data and "Wait

time" starts counting down.

To edit the save length

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the flashing field

between "minutes" and "seconds".

Use the [JOG] dial to set the value for the flashing

field.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to

be saved.

For the first several seconds, the VF80EX transmits

the pilot signal that will be a reference for locating

the tape position during the load operation, and the

actual data saving starts from the position at which

"Wait Time" starts counting down.

Data is saved in 2-track unit. When the data saving is

completed, "Completed!" appears on the screen and

the VF80EX stops.

Flashing

<Note>

If you interrupts saving before completing, the saved

data is invalid.

Select tracks to be saved.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the blinking field

between "From" and "To".

Stop the external recorder.

Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the

blinking field.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.

For the "To" field, you can select a higher value than

the "From" field value among 8, 16 and 24.

Accordingly, you can set "Save Track Area" to one of

the following.

• To cancel each operation or to return to the previous

screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the

key returns to the previous screen level and finally

exits the setup mode.

"From 1 To 8", "From 1 to 16", "From 1 To 24", "From 9 To

16", "From 9 To 24", and "From 17 To 24"

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Loading data using the S/PDIF digital signal

You can load data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] (coaxial) jack.

*Use an external recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF80EX).

Connecting to an external recorder

Loading data

Connect the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] jack to the digital

You can load data via the "Load PGM" menu in the

output jack of the external digital recorder.

setup mode.

• Input signal options: S/PDIF and IDE (CD-R/RW drive)

<Note>

Do not do anything, such as unplug the coaxial cable,

that interrupts the digital signal until the loading

operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may

generates a noise which damages an external recorder.

• Program options:

• Track options:

P01 to P99 (an individual Program)

* When using S/PDIF:

Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24

or Tracks 17-24.

* When using IDE (CD-R/RW drive):

All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks

individually when saving by the WAV file format).

VF80EX

POWER

PHANTOM

ON OFF

S/P DIF

OUTPUT

DATA

INPUT

MIDI

OUTPUT

Press the SETUP key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

INPUT

S/P DIF DATA INPUT

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the recorder

from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flashes.

Digital Equipment

• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital

input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use

the optional COP-1/96k (optical/coaxial converter).

• Do not connect digital signals for both directions

between the VF80EX and the external recorder (i.e.

the digital output of the VF80EX to the digital input

of the external recorder and the digital output of the

external recorder to the digital input of the VF80EX),

which may form a digital loop and cause feedback.

Flashing

Setting the external recorder

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to set "Load

Device Select" to "SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

Make preparations of the external recorder for

outputting the digital signal.

The display shows the screen for selecting a load

destination program to which data is loaded.

A program number currently selected blinks, followed

by its program name. The data size of the current

program is also shown. When a program number is

flashing, you can select the desired load destination

program.

Locate to the beginning of the pilot signal for the song

data.

• See the operation manual of the external recorder for the

detailed information.

Flashing

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

You can select a load destination program from existing

programs on the current drive as well as "New PGM".

When selecting "New PGM", a new program is created.

When the VF80EX is locking to the digital input signal,

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows "Play Start Player!".

• If you load data to a program in which data is

already recorded, the newly loaded data

overwrites the current data track by track.

Consequently, on each overwritten track, the

loaded data becomes valid while the current data

is erased.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to which

data is loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to

be loaded.

Start playback of the external recorder.

After reading the pilot signal recorded when saving

the data, the data starts loading automatically.

When starts loading, the display shows something like

the one below, in which "Wait time" starts counting

down.

Flashing

Select tracks to be loaded.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the flashing field

between "From" and "To".

Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the

flashing field.

For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.

For the "To" field, you can select from 8, 16 and 24.

For example, if you select "From 1 to 24", data for all

tracks (1 to 24) will be loaded.

Data is loaded in 2-track unit.

While loading, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

for channels 1 and 2 flash, while the input levels are

displayed by level meters 1 and 2.

When the data loading is completed, "Completed!"

appears on the screen.

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key

again.

<Note>

The display shows something like the one below. A

load destination program (existing or new program)

to which the data is loaded and tracks to be loaded

are shown, while "Sure?" flashes.

If you quit loading before completing, the loaded

data is invalid.

Stop the external recorder.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

Flashing

• To cancel each operation or to return to the previous

screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the

key returns to the previous screen level and finally

exits the setup mode.

<Note>

In the above step, if the VF80EX does not lock to the

digital signal from the external digital recorder, the

following warning message appears on the display,

showing that the VF80EX does not receive a correct S/

PDIF digital signal. So check the cable connection and

the digital output setting of the external digital

recorder.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Save/Load using CD-RW/CD-R

By using the built-in CD-R/RW drive (Model CD-1AEX), you can save/load data in the FDMS-3

format or WAV file format, as well as create or load an audio CD (CD-DA).

Please read the notes below first before performing the save/load operation.

Please read this first!

With a CD-R/RW drive, you can use not only CD-RW discs but also CD-R discs. Note that CD-R

discs has some restrictions as shown below.

CD-R disc

CD-RW disc

You can save (record) data to a disc as many times

required. Note that when saving new data, it is recorded

after the previously recorded data is erased. In other

words, every time you save new data, all disc data is

rewritten. (See “Saving data” described later.)

You can save (record) data to a disc only once.

You cannot save data to a recorded disc. You can, of

course, load data as many times as required.

<Note>

A CD-RW/CD-R disc on which VF80EX data is recorded can only be played by Fostex machines. Do

not play it by non-Fostex devices. The drive or system used may be damaged.

However, a CD-RW/CD-R disc with audio CD format created by the Fostex machine can be played by

general machines such as audio CD players. (If an audio CD is made using a CD-RW disc, it can be played

back only by a player that supports CD-RW playback.You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD

player that does not support CD-RW playback.)

The writing and reading speeds for data save and load of the VF80EX are automatically set as below.

• Writing speed: according to a CD-R/RW drive used, however the maximum speed is 8 times.

• Reading speed: according to a CD-R/RW drive used.

The writing speed depends on a CD-R/RW drive but it is limited to 8 times.

For save/load of the VF80 data, use discs that can be written at 4 times or higher speed. Do not use

discs that only can be written at real-time or twice speed.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Save/load of Song Data Using a CD-R/RW drive

The save/load operation using a CD-RW/CD-R disc is performed in the following manners.

• Save

You can only a single selected program data to a

disc regardless of the program data amount.

You cannot save more than one program data even

Save

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

if there are enough disc space.

However, you can save a program data to more

than one disc if the data amount is larger than a

disc space.

As shown on the right, you can save almost all

necessary information such as song data of all

tracks (real and additional tracks) and mixer scene

data.

Program 2 (P02)

Program 1 (P01)

Program 99 (P99)

Current drive of the VF80EX

• Load

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

The data loading using a CD-R/RW drive is taken

place after a “new program” is created in the cur-

rent drive (the load destination).

You cannot overwrite an existing program with

the loaded data.

The newly created program is numbered the next

number to the highest existing program number.

Load

Program 2 (P02)

New program

Program 1 (P01)

Current drive of the VF80EX

• Creating an audio CD

You can make an audio CD by recording sound data of tracks 1 and 2 between the “Start point” and “End

point” to a CD-RW/CD-R disc. It is also possible to record some mastered materials continuously.

• Loading an audio CD data

You can load a material on a (commercial or created) audio CD to a program of the VF80EX.

Audio data is loaded to a “new program” automatically created by the VF80EX, which is the same way as

backup data loading. The VF80EX never overwrites the existing program.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Saving data using a CD-R/RW drive (Backup)

The following description is assumed that a non-recorded CD-R/RW disc is used.

<Note>

Do not carry out any VF80EX key operation until the

access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed.

flashing

After turning on the VF80EX, insert a disc to the CD-

R/RW drive.

While “BkUp” flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a backup

mode (between FDMS-3 and WAV), where “WAV” is

flashing.

Press the [SETUP] key of the VF80EX to enter the

setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

flashing

Use the [CURSOR <] key to select (highlight)“FDMS3”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a program

to be saved (the program number of the selected pro-

gram flashes).

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) “Save PGM”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a save de-

vice, where“IDE” is flashing.

Flashing

recorded

space

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select a desired

program number/title from among available programs

in the VF80EX current drive. The recorded space of

the selected program is also shown.

If you select a program which requires more than one

disc for saving, the display shows the required num-

ber of discs (see the screen example below).

Flashing

While “IDE” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After briefly showing the model name of the connected

CD-R/RW drive, the display shows the screen for se-

lecting a save mode, where “BkUp” (backup) is flash-

ing.

number of

discs

To save (backup) song data, select “BkUp”.

After selecting a program, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen as below.

To make an audio CD, select “CD-DA” or “Setup”.

This procedure describes how to save song data, so

we select “BkUp” here.

See “making an audio CD” described later for details

about how to make an audio CD.

Flashing

flashing

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

In the example above, the selected program data will

be saved to a CD-RW/CD-R disc with the backup num-

ber “B01”. The program title is copied to the backup

title (you can not edit it).

By rotating the [JOG] dial when the above screen is

shown, you can also select “Eject”, besides “B01”.

If you select “Eject” and then press the [ENTER/YES]

key, the disc will be ejected.

If an error occurs for some reason during the save

operation, the error message as below appears.

If it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the previous screen before

performing the save operation.

Note that saved data before the error message ap-

pears is all invalid.

While “B01” is shown, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The VF80EX starts the save operation.

The recorded space shown on the display is counted

down while the save operation progresses.

It will take some time for saving all data. The follow-

ing display example shows that the data of the se-

lected program number is being saved to the backup

number“B01”.

<Note>

If the message above appears while saving data

to a CD-R disc, you can no longer use the disc.

When completing the save operation, “Save Com-

pleted!” appears on the display (as shown below) and

the VF80EX stops access to the drive, while the disc in

the CD-R/RW drive is automatically ejected.

In the description for saving data above, we assume

to use a non-recorded CD-RW/CD-R disc.

If you use a recorded disc (including a disc on which

computer data is recorded), also note the following.

By performing step 5 in the save operation proce-

dure shown above (“While “BkUp” is flashing, press

the [ENTER/YES] key”.) When a recorded disc is in-

serted, the display shows a warning message, fol-

lowed by the confirmation screen (where “Sure?”

flashes).

When saving data to more than one disc, the first disc

will be ejected when it is full (i.e. there is no more

recording space on the disc), while “Insert Disk!” ap-

pears on the screen.

With this screen, you can choose whether erasing

the recorded data or ejecting the disc.

After inserting the second disc, the VF80EX automati-

cally resumes the save operation.

After completing the save operation, the final disc is

ejected and the above screen appears. (See <Note> be-

low).

<Note>

You cannot abort the save operation before com-

pleted. Especially during the save operation to

more than one disc, if you happen to press the

[EXIT/NO] key while removing or inserting a disc,

you have to redo the save operation from the

beginning with the first disc.

Flashing

If you save data to more than one disc, we rec-

ommend to put a number on each disc in the

saving order (such as DISC-1, DISC-2, etc.) so

that you will easily know the order for inserting

discs when loading data.

•To erase the existing (recorded) data

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while both “ERASE” and

“Sure?” are flashing.

The display shows the screen below and the

VF80EX starts erasing the disc.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the Setup mode.

As the erase process progresses, the number of

flashing “ * ” increases from left to right.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Flashing

Increases as the process progresses.

Immediately after completing erasing the disc, the

display shows the same screen (for selecting a pro-

gram to be saved) which appears after step 5 is

performed. Hereafter, perform the same proce-

dure as described above.

•To eject the disc

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight “Eject” (flashing)

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disc is ejected while the display shows “Insert

Disk!”.

By inserting a disc, you can start the save opera-

tion again from the beginning.

If you try to save data to a recorded CD-R disc, the

display shows a warning message saying “Not Writ-

able”, followed by a message saying “Insert Disk” as

below.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Loading backup data from a CD-R/RW drive

The following description is assumed that you have a CD-RW/CD-R disc which contains saved data.

While “IDE” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

<Note>

After briefly showing the model name of the connected

CD-R/RW drive, the display shows the screen for se-

lecting a load mode, where “BkUp” (backup) is flash-

ing.

Do not carry out any VF80EX key operation until

the access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is com-

pleted.

To load song data saved, select“BkUp”.

To load a material from an audio CD, select “CD-DA”.

After turning on the VF80EX, insert the disc to the

CD-R/RW drive.

This procedure describes how to load song data, so

we select “BkUp” here.

See “Loading from an audio CD” described later for de-

tails about how to load a material from an audio CD.

<Note>

If you load song data which is saved to more

than one disc, set DISC-1 first.

If you set the other disc and go on the follow-

ing procedure, the VF80EX automatically rec-

ognized that the disc order i s not correct and

the display shows “Wrong Disk”, followed by

“Illegal No!” momentarily, and the disc is au-

tomatically ejected.

Flashing

While“BkUp”is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the backup number and title, as

well as recorded space.

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

Flashing

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select a desired

program number/title from among available programs

in the VF80 current drive. You can also select “Eject”.

If you select “Eject” and press the [ENTER/YES] key,

the disc is ejected

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) “Load PGM”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a load de-

vice, where “IDE” is flashing.

When you load song data which is saved to more

than one disc, the display also shows the disc num-

ber currently set. The example below shows DISC-

1 is set.

Flashing

Light up

Flashing

While the desired backup number/title is shown on

the display, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for creating a new pro-

gram on the current drive, to which data will be loaded

(“New PGM” lights).

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Light up

Flashing

As described earlier, when loading data from a CD-R/

RW drive, the VF80EX creates a new program on the

current drive, which is the load destination.

Therefore, “New PGM” is shown on the right of the

flashing program number.

When loading data from more than one disc, the first

disc will be ejected immediately after all disc data has

been loaded, while “Insert Disk!” appears on the screen.

After inserting the second disc, the VF80EX automati-

cally resumes the load operation.

The program number for the newly created destina-

tion program is the next number to the highest exist-

ing program number.

After completing loading all the discs, the above screen

appears.

For example, if there are 8 existing programs (“P01”

through “P08”) on the current drive, the newly cre-

ated program is numbered “P09”.

<Note>

You cannot abort the load operation before com-

pleted.

<Note>

If you rotate the [JOG] dial while the above screen

(“Destn PGM Select”) is shown, you can select an

existing program on the current drive as the desti-

nation. However, as mentioned earlier, when load-

ing data using CD-R/RW drive you cannot actually

load data to the existing program by overwriting

the program data.

If you press the [ENTER/YES] key (see the next step)

while selecting an existing program as the destina-

tion, the display shows “Void!” and the VF80EX ig-

nores the operation.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the setup mode.

If an error occur for some reason during the

load operation, the error message as below ap-

pears.

If it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the previous screen be-

fore performing the load operation.

Note that loaded data before the error message

appears is all invalid.

While “New PGM” is shown, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The VF80EX starts the load operation.

The recorded space shown on the display is counted

down while the load operation progresses.

It will take some time for loading all data.

The following display example shows that the data of

the backup number “B01” is being loaded to “P08”

which is newly created on the current drive.

<Note>

If there is not enough available space for loading

on the current drive, the display shows “Disk Full!”

and the display returns to the previous screen.

When completing the load operation, “Load Com-

pleted!” appears on the display (as shown below) and

the VF80EX stops access to the drive, while the disc in

the CD-R/RW drive is automatically ejected.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Saving a WAV file

Song data can be saved to or load from a CD-R/CD-RW disc by the FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-

3) format, as well as by the WAV file format. As you can handle song data of the VF80EX with a WAV file, it is

possible to directly import/export data from/to a personal computer, to playback/edit a data file with various

software applications, and to import a data file edited by a computer to the VF80EX.

About directory of a backup disk:

• A WAV file saved is recorded in the root directory (in the first layer) on the backup disk.

• A WAV file that can be loaded must be allocated in the root directory on the backup disk.

A WAV file moved from the root directory to another area such as a folder cannot be recognized by the

VF80, which may cause a malfunction.

About file names of WAV files

• A WAV file the VF80EX saves is recorded with a file name "******##.WAV".

• A WAV file the VF80EX can load must have a file name "******##.WAV".

The first 6 characters "******" are the title that is shown in the "Title Edit" screen in the setup mode.

These characters can be changed when saving using a WAV file or edited by a computer.

The following 2 characters "##" indicate the track number (1 to 24) for the save/load using a WAV file.

The last ". WAV" is the file extension indicating that the file format is WAV.

The VF80EX does not recognize other file names than above. See the following description for each

operation about details.

By using the specifications above, you can load only the desired tracks of a WAV file or load a track-

swapped WAV file. See "Loading a WAV file" described later for details.

You can save a WAV file. The following procedure assumes that the newly CD-RW/CD-R disk is used for

backup.

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup

menu.

While "WAV" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting On or Off

of the Edit Source Export function, where "Off" flashes.

You can switches between On and Off by using the

[CURSOR] keys .

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. "IDE" flashes.

Flashing

If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END" (in

most cases), you do not have to change the setting

here.

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the backup

mode (FDMS 3 or WAV), where "WAV" flashes.

The Edit Source Export function allows you to save

the desired range of data between the Start and

End points which are set when executing the Copy-

paste or Move-paste function.

Therefore, if you want to save only the specific range

of data, you have to register the Start and End points

before the save operation.

See "Track Editing" in "Recorder Function" for details

about how to set the Start and End points.

Flashing

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

After selecting the track(s), press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a WAV file

on the disk.

<Note>

If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END", make

sure to set the Edit Source Export function to Off.

If no file is recorded on the disk, "WAV" and "Sure?"

flashes. You can select "Eject" by rotating the [JOG]

dial. To remove the disk, select "Eject" and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

While "Off" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a program

to be saved. The program number currently selected

flashes, while the data size of the program is shown.

Flashing

<Hints>

Use the [JOG] dial to select a program to be saved

If the backup disk contains any existing program(s)

previously saved, the display may show following

screens after carrying out the previous step, depending

on the available space of the backup disk.

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a track to

be saved. Initially, "All Track" flashes.

•Showing the title and "New File":

There is enough space for creating a new WAV file in

addition to the existing WAV files on the disk.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key advances to the next step

(for editing the file name).

Flashing

After completing the save operation, this new WAV file

will be added on the disk.

By rotating the [JOG] dial (or press the [CURSOR] </>

key), you can select "From ** To **" (where the left field

flashes initially) instead of "All Track".

If you save data for all tracks (1 through 24), select

"All Track". If you save data for any specific track(s),

select "From ** To **" and specify the desired track

numbers.

•Showing the title and "New File", and "-****MB"

alternately:

The space for adding a new WAV file to the existing

WAV files on the disk is ****MB short.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",

followed by "Delete All WAV?".

Flashing

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV

file on the disk and advances to the next step (for

editing the file name)

After completing the save operation, only this new WAV

file will remain on the disk.

By rotating the [JOG] dial while the left ("From") field

is flashing, you can select the track number from 01

through 24. The number in the right ("To") field

automatically follows the number in the left field (i.e.

numbers in the left and right fields are always the same).

Therefore, if you want to save a single track, you just

have to set the right ("From") field and do not have to

set the right ("To") field. For example, "From 02 To 02"

will save only track 2.

To specify tracks 5 through 12:

• Enter "05" to the left field while the left field is

flashing.

• Press the [CURSOR </>] key to make the right field

flashing.

• Enter "12". (Note that the number for the right field

must be equal to or larger than the left field.)

•Showing the title and "****MB":

To get enough space for creating a WAV file, the

specified file on the backup disk will be deleted.

By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, "DEL" appears.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again will delete the

specified WAV file on the disk and advances to the

next step (for editing the file name).

After completing the save operation, the specified WAV

file will be replaced with the new WAV file on the disk.

Finally the screen shows "From 05 to 12" to save tracks

5 through 12.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

When saving data onto more than one disk, the current

disk number is shown on the screen as "Disk *" (where

* indicates the number).

Immediately after the data save to each disk is

completed, the disk is automatically ejected, and "Insert

Disk *" blinks on the screen, prompting you to insert

the next disk.

•Showing the title and "-****MB":

Even if the specified file is deleted, the space for

creating a new WAV file on the disk is ****MB short.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",

followed by "Delete All WAV?".

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV

file on the disk and advances to the next step (for

editing the file name).

Inserting the next disk resumes the save operation.

After completing the save operation, only the new WAV

file will remain on the disk.

After the save operation is completed, "Save

Completed!" appears on the screen.

After selecting a file, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the WAV file.

<Hint>

In the save operation which requires more than

one backup disk, if you use a backup disk which

contains any program(s) saved, the display shows

the screen as shown below.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can set the desired

numeric, symbolic or alphabetical character to the

blinking point. You can move the blinking point by

using the [CURSOR] keys.

See the following table for the available characters.

Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z)

Numerals (0 to 9)

Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -)

This screen is asking you weather to delete all

existing WAV files on the disk or to eject the disk.

To delete all the existing files, select "All Delete" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key. All existing files are

deleted and the disk is ready for saving data.

If you do not want to delete the existing files, select

"Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disk is ejected so you can insert another disk.

To select between "All Delete" and "Eject", press the

[CURSOR] key.

<Note>

You can use up to 6 characters for a file name.

Some characters entered are converted as shown

below.

• Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z): not

converted

• Lower-case alphabetical characters (a to z):

converted to the corresponding upper-case

• Numerals (0 to 9): not converted

• Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -): not converted

• Other symbols: converted to "_".

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

After entering the file name, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The save operation is executed and the display shows

something like the one as below. As the file save goes

on, the remaining data size shown on the screen counts

down.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

• WAV file structure

A WAV file on the backup disk has 24 files (one file

per track) in the root directory of the disk.

The file names are "******01.WAV" through

"******24.WAV" where "******" shows the file name

specified in step 8 above and each number (01 - 24)

shows the corresponding track number.

If a track has no data recorded, the corresponding file

with no data is created.

###### 01. WAV

###### 02. WAV

###### 24. WAV

• WAV file structure which is saved over more than

one disk

A WAV file is saved in order of track number (from

tracks 1 to 24).

During the save operation over more than one backup

disk, the VF80EX always calculates the available space

of the disk automatically. If the VF80EX knows that

the available space gets smaller than the data size of

the next track, it will change the disk when the data

save of the current track is completed.

• WAV file size

When saving data by the WAV file format to a backup

disk, the file size may sometimes increase compared

with the data size in the current drive, depending on

the recorded data condition such as the start time,

end time, the data amount, etc. on each track.

For example, if a track is recorded from ABS:0 (min.)

to ABS:1 (min.) and ABS:10 (min.) to ABS 11 (min.),

the file on the current drive has a length of 2 minutes,

while the WAV file has a length of 11 minutes.

Also as mentioned above, if a track has no data

recorded, the corresponding WAV file with no data is

created though the size is small.

<Notes>

• If the file name you are going to save duplicates

with the existing WAV file name on the backup disk,

"Warning! Already Exist" is shown on the screen and

the save operation will not be executed.

In such a case, change the file name according to

the procedure above and carry out the save

operation again.

• A disk on which you have overwritten data many

times may lower the access speed because of the

disk fragmentation. Therefore, we suggest that you

should use a newly formatted "clean" disk for

backup.

• If any other file but "******##.WAV" or folder, which

cannot be recognized by the VF80EX, is created on

the backup disk using a personal computer, the

VF80EX cannot calculate the available backup disk

space accurately. Accordingly, it may happen that

the save operation cannot be completed. You should

note this when changing the file name or creating a

folder using your computer.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Loading a WAV file

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup

menu.

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press

Flashing

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flashes.

When the screen shows "Title" and "Size", the selected

program will be deleted and replaced with the WAV

file loaded.

When the screen shows "Title" and "New PGM", the WAV

file loaded will create a new program.

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the drive name, followed by the

screen for selecting the WAV file to be loaded, showing

the WAV file name and size.

If no disk is inserted, "No SCSI Disk!" is shown.

<Note>

If the current drive does not have enough available

space for loading the WAV file, the size indication

on the screen shows a negative value ("-***").

In such a case, select a program that can be replaced

with the WAV file loaded without causing the disk

space shortage, or delete unnecessary programs by

the "Delete PGM" menu in the setup mode.

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired WAV file to

After selecting the load destination program, press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

be loaded.

If more than one WAV file with different file names

(the first 6 characters) is saved, you can see each file

name (by the first 6 characters) in order when rotating

the [JOG] dial. You can also select "Eject" to remove

the backup disk.

When selecting a new program as the load destination

(by selecting an option showing "Title" and "New PGM"),

the load operation immediately starts.

When selecting an existing program as the load

destination (by selecting an option showing "Title" and

"Size"), "Overwrite?" and "Sure?" appear.

<Note>

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key will start the load

operation.

During the load operation, the screen shows something

like the one as below.

As the data load goes on, the remaining data size shown

on the screen counts down.

The VF80EX cannot recognize any other file names

but "******##.WAV" and cannot load such disks. A

WAV file with an unique name (the first 6

characters) is recognized as an independent backup

file and can be selected.

After selecting the desired WAV file, press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a track to

be loaded. "All" flashes initially.

Besides "All", you can select any one of tracks (01

through 24) by rotating the [JOG] dial (or press the

[CURSOR] </> key).

Flashing

When the load operation is completed, "Load

Completed!" appears on the screen.

After selecting the desired track(s), press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the load

destination program to which a WAV file is loaded.

You can select the program by using the [JOG] dial.

<Note>

The title of the program to which the WAV file is

loaded is replaced with the WAV file name loaded

(the first 6 characters).

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly

until exiting the setup mode.

To go back to the previous step or abort the operation,

you can also use the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] key.

<< Special loading method when using a computer >>

< Note>

WAV files which can be saved/loaded by this recorder must have file names written as “******##.WAV.”

Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder.

Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction. Extreme care should be taken when

changing file names and making folders on a computer.

* The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode “Title Edit” display.

* The last two letters “##” represent each track number (1-24) of the WAV file which are to be saved/loaded.

* The last “WAV” is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file.

* File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital

letters. However, in certain computers, this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters.

(*) Method to load specific tracks.

The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from “******01.WAV” up to “******24.WAV.” Should these files

be deleted, moved from the root directory, for example, into a another folder or the file name changed which cannot

be acknowledged, this recorder will not recognize this file.

When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded, only WAV files with file names “******##.WAV” which are

located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded.

For example, if the “zero number of data” made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is executed, only

WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded.

(*) When loading WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks, they can be loaded by a special method

derived from the above method.

Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with “******01.WAV” through “******12.WAV” and disc 2 saved with “******13.WAV”

through “******24.WAV.”

First, when backup disk 1 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 will be loaded. At this point, tracks 13-24 will not be loaded

and thus be non-recorded. Next, when backup disk 2 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 remains intact and tracks 13-24

only will be loaded.

****** 01. WAV

****** 12. WAV

****** 13. WAV

****** 24. WAV

Backup Disk 1

Backup Disk 2

(*) Method in loading by changing the track.

If the two letters “##” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them

on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save. For example, if a WAV file named “ABCDEF01.WAV”

on track 1 is changed to “ABCDEF03.WAV” this WAV file will be loaded on track 3.

(*) Method in loading by changing the title.

If the 6 letters “******” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them

on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save. Letters which can be used at changing the file

name in a computer are those only indicated below. All of these letters must be one byte size.

Alphabets

Numerals

Symbols

: A-Z and a-z

: 0-9

: !#$%&’()@‘_=

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Making an audio CD

The following procedure describes how to record mastered songs (using the internal mastering function) to a

CD-RW/CD-R disc to make an audio CD (CD-DA format).

The “Save PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is used for saving song data, is also used for making an audio

CD.

VF80EX

INPUT

BAL

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

CD-RW/CD-R disc

When making an audio CD using the VF80EX, inter-

nal mastering materials on the current drive are

recorded to a CD-RW/CD-R disc (by the CD-DA for-

mat).

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

FADER

MAP

PAN

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

CH ON/OFF

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

TRACK STATUS

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK MASTER

CURSOR

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

You can record not only a single song but also mul-

tiple songs continuously.

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

LOCATE

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

PITCH

LOOP

EDIT

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

<Note>

If an audio CD is made using a CD-R/RW disc, it can be played back only by a player that supports CD-R/RW

playback. You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD player that does not support CD-R/RW play-

back.

In the following operations, we assume that there

are one or more programs which are mixed down

by the internal mastering mode on the current

drive.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “IDE” flashes.

After showing the model name of the connected CD-

R/RW drive, the display shows the screen for select-

ing the save mode, in which “BkUp” flashes.

To make an audio CD, select “CD-DA”. However, if

necessary, you can make the write condition setting

by selecting “Setup”. The setteing includes copy pro-

tection ON/OFF (by default, “OFF”) and mark enabled/

disabled (by default, “ON”).

<Note>

Key operations of the VF80EX should be done af-

ter completing access to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

If you do not need to change the default write condi-

tion shown above, skip to step 7.

After turning on the power of theVF80EX, load a non-

recorded disc to the CD-R/RW drive.

Flashing

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) the“Save PGM”

menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. “IDE” flashes.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR]

key) to

select “Setup” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display changes to show the write condition set-

ting screen, in which you can make the copy protec-

tion ON/OFF and mark enabled/disabled settings.

See the next page for details.

Flashing

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

About “Copy protection” setting

You can restrict the disc copy (duplication) capa-

bility of an audio CD you are going to make.

The display shows the screen in which the last pro-

gram number of the current drive flashes.

Its program title and recording time are also shown,

while the total time of songs is shown at the top of the

screen.

A disc you made can be copied to other digital

device once.

Data between the "Start point" and "End point" is trans-

ferred to an audio CD.

A disc you made can be copied to other digital

device as many times as required (default).

OFF

Before executing recording, we recommend you to con-

firm that the actual audio in the program starts just

after the "Start point" and ends just before "End point".

About “Mark Enable” setting

You can select whether enabling or disabling marks

registered between the start and end point.

See page 128 for details about “Mark Enable”

setteing.

Flashing

Enables marks registered between the start and

end point. When making an audio CD, the mas-

tered material is divided into tracks by marks.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a desired program and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected program is set to the first track.

Disables (ignores) marks registered between the

start and end point. When making an audio CD,

the mastered material is not divided into tracks.

OFF

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired setting item,

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently selected

option starts flashing. You can now change the setting

by using the [JOG] dial to select the desired option

(“ON” or “OFF”) and pressing the [ENTER/YES] key to

fix the selection.

Flashing

•

To record a single song to a CD-RW/CD-R disc,

select a program and press the [ENTER/YES] key,

and then go to step 10.

After making the write condition, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The display returns to the screen for selecting the save

mode, in which “CD-DA” now flashes.

To record more than one song to a CD-RW/CD-R

disc, repeat the procedure for selecting a program

described above (i.e. use the [JOG] dial to select a

program and press the [ENTER/YES] key) until

selecting all desired programs, and then go to step

10.

Flashing

<Note>

If the program time shows “00: 00” when selecting a pro-

gram as the screen example below, the “Start” and “End”

points are not correctly set.

While“CD-DA”is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After showing “Please Wait!”, the display shows the

screen for selecting the program(s) to be record.

In the screen, a number such as “01” or “02” shows the

track number, while “NON” shows that no program is

assigned to the track.

In other words, in the following conditions, the “Start”

and “End” points are not regarded as being correctly

set.

“Start point” = “End point”

“Start point” > “End point”

If you press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting such a

program, the warning message as below appears on

the display and you cannot select the program.

Flashing

“Void In!”,“Void Out!”, or “Void Data!”

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

If you press the [ENTER/YES] key, the display changes

to show flashing "Insert Disk" for prompting you to

insert another disc to the drive.

Depending on the disc you are going to insert, go to

either of the steps below.

<Note>

It is possible to select a program that is not inter-

nal mastering if it holds the correct “Start” and “End”

points. However, if you record such a program to a

CD-RW/CD-R disc with the audio CD format, only

track 1 and 2 can be recorded.

So, make sure that you select programs properly

when making an audio CD.

When recording more than one program to a CD-

RW/CD-R disc, do not skip any track when assign-

ing programs to tracks.

• When using a blank CD-R/RW disc

If you skip any track, you cannot record data to the

subsequent tracks. In the following example, track

03 is skipped when assigning programs.

Set a blank CD-R/RW disc to the tray and close the tray.

After reading the disc, the VF80EX starts recording to

the disc.

So only tracks 01 and 02 will be recorded. Tracks

03 and subsequent tracks can not be recorded.

When the recording ends, "Save Completed!" appears

on the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected

from the CD-R/RW drive (as same as step 10 above).

If you record the same material to another disc, re-

peat the steps above.

<Note>

When making an audio CD, if you select a program

which consumes more disc space than the record-

able space of a CD-RW/CD-R disc, “Disk Full!” ap-

pears on the display and you cannot select the pro-

gram.

When completed, press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the

Setup mode.

• When using a recorded CD-RW disc

Set a recorded CD-RW disc to the tray and close the tray.

After reading the disc, the display shows a warning mes-

sage ("Not Empty!"), followed by the screen for selecting

whether erasing data or ejecting the disc.

After specifying the program(s), press the [ENTER/

YES] key while holding down the [RECORD] key.

The VF80EX starts recording to the disc, while the dis-

play shows the following screen.

To eject the disc, use the [JOG] dial to select "Eject"

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

To erase data, go to the next step..

While "ERASE" is highlighted, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

When the recording ends, “Save Completed!” appears

on the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected

from the CD-R/RW drive.

The VF80EX starts erasing the existing data.

After erasing all data, recording starts.

When the recording ends, "Save Completed!" appears

on the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected

from the CD-R/RW drive (as same as step 10 above).

If you record the same material to another disc, re-

peat the steps above.

This message asks you whether recording the same

material to another disc or finishing recording.

To finish recording, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

To record the same material to another disc, press the

[ENTER/YES] key and go to either step 11 below.

When completed, press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the

Setup mode.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

The Mark Enable setting selects enabling or disabling marks registered between the Start and End points

of a material which is internally mastered for creating an audio CD.

If you record a song which has marks (as above) to a

CD-R/RW disc while "Mark Enable" is set to "ON", the

song is divided into tracks by marks (see the figure

below).

Normally, when mastering a song using the internal

mastering function, the Start and End points are au-

tomatically set (see the figure below). The Start point

acts as "mark" at the beginning of the song.

By default, the "Mark Enable" is set to "ON" (enabled).

Therefore, when recording to a CD-R/RW disc, the

VF80EX recognizes the material between the Start and

End points as a song (track).

Therefore, when creating an audio CD from a mas-

tered song which has any mark(s), make sure that

"Mark Enable" is set to "OFF", in order to ignore the

mark(s) except the Start point (Mark00) and prevent

the song from being divided into tracks.

Start point

End point

mastered song

Start point

End point

Mark 02

Mark 03

Mark 01

However, if a mastered song has any mark(s) (be-

sides the Start point), set "Mark Enable" to "OFF".

Note that the Start point is always recognized as

"Mark00" regardless of the "Mark Enable" setting.

The figure below shows the example of a mastered

song which has marks.

Track 1 (CD01)

Track 2 (CD02)

Track 3 (CD03)

Start point

End point

Mark 01

Mark 02

Mark 03

Track 4 (CD04)

mastered song

<"Mark Enable" should also be set to "OFF" in such a case!>

Let's assume that there are two programs; program 1 and program 2. The material in program 1 has marks,

while the material in program 2 does not (as shown in figure below).

If you make an audio CD from these two materials, burn a disc with "Mark Enable" set to "OFF". In result, you

can make an audio CD containing two tracks (ignoring marks on program 1).

If you burn a disc with "Mark Enable" set to "ON", program 1 is divided into four tracks. In result, a CD

containing five tracks (four from program 1 and one from program 2) is made.

Start point

End point

Start point

End point

Mark 01

Mark 02

Mark 03

Mark 01

Mark 02

Mark 03

Program 1

Start point

End point

Program 2

Program 1

Track 1 (CD01)

Track 2 (CD02)

Track 1 (CD01)

Track 2 (CD02)

Track 3 (CD03)

Program 2

Track 4 (CD04)

Track 5 (CD05)

Program 2

<"Mark Enable" should be set to "ON" in such a case!>

When loading more than one track from an audio CD you made to the VF80EX hard disk, all the tracks are

loaded onto a single program (see "Loading from an audio CD" on the next page for details), in which a mark is

automatically set to the beginning of each track.

Start point

(=Mark 00)

Mark 03

Mark 01

Mark nn

End point

Mark 02

Track n

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

When making an audio CD from a program which has been loaded from an audio CD and contains more than

one track, set "Mark Enable" to "ON". This allows making a CD which contains the same number of tracks as the

number of tracks loaded from an audio CD.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Loading from an audio CD

You can load a desired song to the VF80EX from an audio CD you created by recording on a CD-RW/CD-R

disc. When a desired song is loaded, the VF80EX automatically creates a new program on the current drive,

and the song are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of the program. Loading data from an audio CD is operated via

the “Load PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is the same way as loading backup data.

VF80EX

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

MIX PARAMETER

TRACK

EDIT

SCENE

SCENE SEQ.

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

PLAY

MUTE

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK MASTER

CURSOR

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

SEL

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

LOCATE

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

CD-RW/CD-R disc (or commercially available audio CD)

You can also load a material from a commercially available audio CD in the same manner, however, never use a

material for which a copyright is reserved for a commercial purpose.

Any unauthorized use will constitute infringement of such copyright and will render the infringer liable to an

action at low. Please remember that data included in a commercial audio CD (CD-DA) with copy protection being

turned on cannot be loaded into VF80EX.

The following description is assumed that you have

an audio CD created by the VF80EX (or a commer-

cially available audio CD).

4. Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “IDE” flashes.

After showing the model name of the connected CD-

RW drive, the display shows the screen for selecting

the load mode, in which “BkUp” flashes.

To carry out loading a song from an audio CD, select

“CD-DA”.

<Note>

Do not carry out any VF80EX key operation until the

access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed.

Flashing

After turning on the power of the VF80EX, load a

recorded audio CD disc to the CD-R/RW drive.

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR]

(highlight) “CD-DA”, then press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

A warning message for copyright appears.

You can scrolls the message to read all message by

rotating the [JOG] dial.

key) to select

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) the “Load

PGM” menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

from which the data is loaded. “IDE” flashes.

Flashing

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

The warning message for copyright shown on the

screen is as follows.

Warning!

You are responsible for use of this digital de-

vice. Be sure to abide by the copyright condi-

tions of the source material.

Press “Enter/Yes” key if you agree with the

above.

<Hint>

• When selecting “All”:

The warning message above also appears when

setting the “Digital In setting” menu to “On”.

See “Setup mode” on page 130 for details.

All tracks on the audio CD are selected to be loaded,

and the screen as shown below appears. In this screen

example, the destination program newly created on

the current drive is “P05”. Each track time is also

shown.

<Note>

If you do not agree with the warning message con-

tents, press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit loading.

The display briefly shows “Set Disable” and “Can’t

Loading”, then returns to the mode select screen.

If you agree with the warning message contents,

go to the next step to continue the operation.

When selecting “All”, you can start loading tracks to

the current drive by pressing the [ENTER/YES] key

while holding down the [RECORD] key.

You can delete an unnecessary track if you want. See

<Hint> below about how to do it.

If you agree to the message contents, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key.

The display changes to show the screen for selecting

the load type, on which “One” flashes.

You can select a desired load type from among the

following.

<Hint>

Before executing “All” track loading, you can de-

lete ahn unnecessary track by the following proce-

dure.

1) While the display shows the screen as above, use

the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to

highlight the desired track and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The destination program number of the selected

track starts flashing.

You can select one or more tracks to be loaded.

One Each selected track is individually loaded to a new

program automatically created on the current drive.

2) Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to

select “NON” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

A track whose destination program number is

set to “NON” is not loaded.

You can select one or more tarcks to be loaded. All

the selected track are loaded to a new program

automatically created on the current drive.

Select

All

All the tracks on an audio CD are loaded to a new

program automatically created on the current drive.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select

(highlight) a desired track to be loaded and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

* “A new program automatically created on the current

drive” has the program number one higher than

the current highest program number.

The load destination program number of the selected

track is shown as a flashing display, as well as the

track time. In the screen example below, track 1 (01)

is selected. The total time is also shown above the track

list. (The total time is summed up each time you se-

lect another track.)

Select the desired “One” or “Select”.

Depending on the selected load type, the display

shows as below.

• When selecting “One” or “Select”:

The left column shows the track numbers (01, 02...)

of the audio CD, while “NON” in the sewcond column

shows no program is selected.

“**” is shown when more than one track is recorded

on the audio CD. It is not shown when only one track

is recorded on the audio CD.

Un this condition, you can choose the option between

“Pxx” (program number) and “NON” using the [JOG]

dial (or the [CURSOR] keys). To cancel the track selec-

tion, choose “NON” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

To set the track to be loaded, go to the next step.

To select desired tracks to be loaded, go to step 8.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected track (“01”, in this example) is set, while

the screen changes as below.

If you select track 1 (01) and then track 3 (03), as

shown in the screen example below, track 3 (03) is

loaded to program 6.

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] keys) to select

(highlight) another desired track to be loaded and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

However, if you select track 2 (02) after selecting tracks

1 and 3, track 2 is loaded to program 6 while track 3 is

reloaded to program 7.

In the example below, track 2 (02) is selected (of

course, you can select whichever track you want).

Depending on the load type (“One” or “Select”) se-

lected in step 7) above, the screen shown is slightly

different.

<Hint>

When a CD-RW disc on which any data is recorded

is set, if you perform step 7 above (i.e. pressing the

[ENTER/YES] key when “CD-DA” is flashing), “Not

Empty!” appears on the display, followed by the

screen for selecting whether erasing recorded data

or ejecting the disc.

When the load type is “Select”

When the load type is “One”

When you set the load type to “One”, the load desti-

nation program number for the secondly selected

track is one higher than that for the firstly selected

track. That is, the load destination program number

is counted up each time you select a track.

On the contrary, when you set the load type to “Se-

lect”, the load destination program number for the

secondly selected track is same as the firstly selected

track. That is, all selected tracks are loaded to the

same program.

Flashing

• If you erase recorded data:

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “ERASE” and

“Sure?” are flashing.

After the key press, the display changes as follows

and the VF80EX starts erasing the data.

As the erasing process is going on, the number of

flashing “ * ” increases.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

As with the firstly selected track, the secondly selected

track (“02”, in this example) is set.

Operate the same procedure as above foe selecting

other track.

Flashing

Increases as the process

progresses.

When completing selecting all desired tracks, press

the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

When erasing is completed, the display shows the

same screen which appears when pressing the [EN-

TER/YES] key after selecting “CD-DA” on step 7 above.

So follow the same procedure from step 8 on page

123.

[RECORD] key.

The display shows “Data Loading!” while tha remain-

ing data amount (in MB) is counted down. You can-

not cancel loading once it starts. Wait for a while until

loading is completed. Loading more amount takes

more time. When completing loading, “Completed!”

is shown, while the audio CD is automatically ejected

from the CD-R/RW drive.

• If you eject the disc:

Use the [JOG] dial to make “Eject” flashing and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disc is ejected, while “Insert Disk!” appears on

the screen.

When inserting a blank disc, you can go on the next

step (see the procedure described above).

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit the Setup mode.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Save/Load of Song data (VF80EX)

<Hint>

To play back a desired loaded track on the current drive, carry out the following operation depending

on the load type.

•To play back a track loaded with the type set to "One":

Select the appropriate program to which the track to be played back is loaded by following the

procedure below. (See "Selecting a program" on page 62 for details about how to select a

program.)

1-1. Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

1-2. Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR

1-3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

] keys) to highlight the appropriate program.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback of the track.

•To play back tracks loaded with the type set to "Select" or "All":

Select the destination program by following the same procedure as step 1 above.

Select a desired track in the program by using the [LOCATE | ] or [LOCATE

recorder is stopped or during playback.

|] key while the

Because all the tracks loaded take part in the same program, you have to select a track within

the program.

The VF80EX automatically set a mark at the beginning of each track loaded with the type set to

"Select" or "All", so pressing [LOCATE | ] or [LOCATE

|] key locates to the beginning of the

previous or next track, as with a typical CD player on the market (see "Mark function" on page

32 for details).

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback of the track.

To check marks, press the [SCENE SEQ./MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key while the recorder

is stopped. The display shows the mark map, allowing you to check the mark positions (in the screen

example below, the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk").

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

SETUP mode

The SETUP mode of the VF80EX offers various menu items including the following types.

• "Setting" menu

• "Check" menu

• "Execution" menu

The "Setting" menu includes 15 menu items as shown in <Table-1> below. These items are set to the

default value when shipping the VF80EX from the factory. By editing the setting when necessary, you

can change the operational environment of the VF80EX. The "Check" menu provides two items for

checking the number of events and current drive information, as shown in <Table-2>. The "Execution"

menu includes three items for saving/loading song data and formatting a disk, as shown in <Table-3>.

You can access these menu items via the SETUP menu.

This chapter describes details only about "Setting" and "Check" menu items. For details about "Execution"

menu items, see the pages shown in <Table-3>.

<Table-1> Setting menu

Contents

Menu item

Signature Set

Tempo Set

Click

Default

Page

134

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

Commonality

Setting a time signature

001BAR 4/4

Setting a tempo

001BAR 1 120

Setting the metronome function

Setting MIDI sync output signal

Setting an MTC frame rate

Setting an MTC offset value

Setting the offset mode

Off

Midi Sync Out

Frame Rate

Mtc Offset

Offset Mode

Slave Mode

Slave Type

Rec Protect

Digital In

MTC

25 frame

00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf

ABS

Off

Vari

Off

Setting the slave mode

Setting the slave type

Setting the record protect function

Setting digital input

Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode

Setting the MIDI device ID number

Setting the fader fix mode

Setting the fader recall mode

Resolution

Device ID

Fader Fix

Off

Fader Recall

: The setting is applicable program by program, and can be saved or loaded as a song data.

: The setting is common to all program and cannot be saved or loaded as a song data.

<Table-2> Check menu

Contents

Menu item

Page

143

Commonality

Check of the event number on the track

Check of the current drive information

Number Of Event

Drive Information

144

<Table-3>“Execution”menu

Contents

Menu item

Load PGM

Save PGM

Disk Format

Page

106

Commonality

Saving song data to an external device

Loading song data from an external device

Formatting an current drive disk

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

To enter the SETUP mode

You can enter the SETUP mode only while the VF80EX is stopped.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key on

<Note>

the panel.

The first time the VF80EX enters the SETUP mode

after turning on the power, the "Signature Set" menu

item is highlighted. From the second time the VF80EX

enters the SETUP mode after turning on the power,

the menu item previously selected is highlighted.

Pressing the [SETUP] key enters the SETUP mode and

the display shows the "Select Menu" screen, the top

menu of the SETUP mode, for selecting the SETUP menu

item. The currently selected menu item is highlighted.

The flashing indicates that invisible menu items exist

below.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a desired menu item and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You are now ready for the actual setup procedure.

To exit the SETUP mode or return to the previous

screen layer, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP]

key).

You can select a desired SETUP menu item using

the [CURSOR / ] keys, as well as the[JOG] dial.

Setting a time signature [“Signature Set”]

Using the "Signature Set" menu item, you can manage time signatures in a song. You can not only specify the

time signature at the beginning of a song, but also change the time signature at desired points within a song

by inserting "time signature events". For example, you can start a song by 4/4 and change to 2/2 from the

third bar. A "tempo map" is created by making time signature and tempo setting. According to a tempo map,

the VF80EX can manage a song by BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, as well as can use the metronome function.

Also, when the VF80EX feeds MIDI clock and song position pointer to an external sequencer, the time signa-

ture and tempo setting must be made.

• Changing the time signature in the middle of a song

• Default setting:

bar 001, 4/4

• Selectable bar numbers: 001 ~ 999

• Selectable time signature: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8,

6/8, 7/8, 8/8, DEL

On the Signature Set screen, highlight "Insert New

Event" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Maximum setting points: 64

"Insert New Event" is replaced with the new time sig-

nature setting event. In the bar field of this event, the

next bar number to the one on the previous event

flashes, while the same time signature as the previous

event is shown.

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

If you carry out the above operation from the default

condition, "002BAR 4/4 " is shown.

Select a program to which you want to set the time

signature.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, select

“Signature Set”and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the "Signature Set" screen. By de-

fault, the screen is as shown below, on which the bar

offset is set to "-002BAR", the time signature from the

first bar is set to "4/4". Depending on what you want

to edit, select the appropriate item using the [JOG]

dial. To edit the bar offset, select "-002BAR Offset". To

select the time signature of the first bar, select "001BAR

4/4ÅÙ". To set a different signature from a desired

bar, select "Insert New Event". To clear all signature/

tempo setting, select "All Clear".

flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired bar number

from which the new time signature is effective, and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The bar number is set and the time signature field

starts flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired time signa-

flashing

ture, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The screen below shows the example of changing the

time signature to "3/4" from the third (003) bar.

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

<Note>

You cannot delete the “001BAR“ of “001BAR 4/4 .”

<Note>

flashing

After editing or deleting time signature events, if a

musical position at which a tempo is specified (see

"Setting a tempo" described later) disappears, the

associated tempo event is automatically deleted.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select among from

following values for bar and time signature fields.

Bar

from 001 to 999.

• Clearing all time signature/tempo events

Time Signature 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8,

8/8,or DEL

<Note>

"DEL" is used to deleted time signature data.

See "Deleting time signature data" below for

details.

By carrying out the procedure below, not only the time

signature events but also the tempo events are cleared.

To insert another time signature event, repeat steps

2 through 5.

On the "Signature Set" screen, select "All Clear" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

"SURE?" flashes on the right of "All Clear", asking

whether you may clear all signature and tempo data.

When completing time signature setting, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the

VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

• Editing a time signature event

flashing

On the "Signature Set" screen, select the desired

event and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current time signature value starts flashing.

All time signature events except the initial "001BAR

4/4 " event, as well as all tempo events are deleted

simultaneously.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired signature and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After clearing all events, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or

The setting is now effective.

the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the VF80EX exits the

SETUP mode.

After editing time signature event, press the [EXIT/

NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the

VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

• Editing the bar offset

• Deleting a time signature event

On the "Signature Set" screen, select "-002BAR Off-

set" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

"002" starts flashing.

On the "Signature Set" screen, select the desired

event and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current time signature value starts flashing.

flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select "DEL".

flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the desired offset value

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You can enter an offset value between -2 and -9.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After editing the bar offset, press the [EXIT/NO] key

The selected event is deleted.

(or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the VF80EX exits

the SETUP mode.

After deleting time signature event, press the [EXIT/

NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the

VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Setting aTempo [“Tempo Set”]

Using the "Tempo Set" menu item, you can manage the tempo in a song. You can not only specify the tempo

at the beginning of a song, but also change the tempo at desired points within a song by inserting "tempo

events". For example, you can start a song by 120 bpm and change to 150 bpm from the third beat of bar 12.

A "tempo map" can be created by making time signature setting (described above) and tempo setting. Accord-

ing to a tempo map, the VF80EX can manage a song by BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, as well as can use the

metronome function. Also, when the VF80EX feeds MIDI clock and song position pointer to an external se-

quencer, the time signature and tempo setting must be made.

<Note>

The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and thus not accurate. Therefore, although the tempo map be

matched with a personal computer, they will gradually drift apart. In order to prevent this drift, the personal computer

side can be set to either MIDI clock sync or, the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to “MIDI Clock”the figure reset to

make it possible for the computer to read the accurate tempo, and the return it again to MTC sync.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired bar number

from which the new tempo setting is effective, and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The bar number is set and the beat field (on the left of

the first " ") starts flashing. The available bar number

depends on the time signature setting described ear-

lier.

• Default setting:

• Selectable bar numbers:according to the time signature setting

• Available beat numbers:according to the time signature setting

bar 001, beat 1:120

• Available tempo:

=30~250, or "DEL" ("DEL" is used for

deleting a tempo.)

• Maximum setting points : 64

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired beat number

from which the new tempo setting is effective, and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The beat number is set and the tempo field (on the

right of " =") starts flashing. The available beat num-

ber depends on the time signature setting described

earlier.

Select a program to which to you want to set the

tempo.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Tempo Set" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the primary "Tempo Set" screen.

By default, the screen is as shown below, on which the

initial tempo at "bar 001, beat 1" is set to "120".

You can set a different tempo from a desired musical

point by selecting "Insert New Event" using the [JOG]

dial.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired tempo in BPM,

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You can enter a desired value between 30 and 250.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key fixes the entered value

and the display returns to the primary Tempo Set

screen.

To insert another tempo event, repeat steps 1 through 4.

When completing time signature setting, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the

flashing

VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

Let's explain how to make tempo setting for the music

example shown below, which has two time signature

events; "001BAR 4/4 " and "005BAR 3/4 ".

• Changing the tempo in the middle of a song

On the primary "Tempo Set" screen, highlight "Insert

New Event" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Tempo = 120

Tempo = 90

On the screen, "Insert New Event" is replaced with the

new tempo setting event. In the bar field of this event,

the next bar number to the one on the previous event

flashes, while the same tempo as the previous event is

shown. If you carry out the above operation from the

Tempo = 60

Tempo = 120

default condition, "002BAR1

=120" is shown.

Tempo Map

Tempo setting

001 BAR 1 = 120

Time signature setting

flashing

001 BAR 4/4

003 BAR 1

= 90

005 BAR 3

007 BAR 2

= 60

005 BAR 3/4

= 120

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

• Editing a tempo event

• Deleting a tempo event

On the primary "Tempo Set" screen, select the de-

sired event and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current time signature value starts flashing.

On the primary "Tempo Set" screen, select the de-

sired event and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current tempo value starts flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the desired tempo and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The setting is now effective.

flashing

After editing tempo event, press the [EXIT/NO] key

(or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the VF80EX exits

the SETUP mode.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to select “DEL”, and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected tempo map will be erased.

After deleting tempo event, press the [EXIT/NO] key

(or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until the VF80EX exits

the SETUP mode.

<Note>

You cannot delete the “001BAR 1

=120.”

Setting the Metronome function [“Click ”]

Using the "Click " menu item, you can select whether or not feeding the metronome click according to the

tempo map during playback or recording. By setting this item to "On", you can play your instrument and

make recording while listening to the metronome.

<Note>

Metronome sound will be output from track 6.

For this reason, when the metronome function is activated, a new sound source cannot be recorded on the

track to which the metronome sound is to be output or sound recorded on this track cannot be played back.

If the metronome function is not to be used, be sure to reset it to “Off.”

• Default:

• Available options:

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Off

Off and On

Use the [JOG] dial to select "On" or "Off" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

By selecting "On", track 6 can output the metronome

click.

Metronome sound will be output from

track 6.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

Off (default)

Metronome sound will not be output.

lect "Click " and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current option (by default, "Off") starts flashing.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the SETUP mode.

flashing

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Setting MIDI sync signal output signal [“Midi Sync Out”]

Using the "Midi Sync Out" menu item, you can select the type of a MIDI sync signal message sent to an

external MIDI device from the MIDI OUT connector on the VF80EX rear panel.

You can select between MIDI clock & song position pointer and MTC (MIDI timecode). Depending on the

device connected to the VF80EX, select the appropriate option.

When selecting MIDI clock & song position pointer, you must make the "Time signature" and "Tempo" set-

tings described earlier. When selecting MTC (MIDI timecode), you must make "MTC frame rate", "MTC offset"

and "MTC offset mode" settings described later.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired option and

• Default:

Clk

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Available options: Clk (MIDI clock & song position)

MTC (MIDI timecode)

CLK (default)

Outputs a MIDI clock & song

Off (No output)

position pointer message.

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Mtc

Off

Outputs aMIDI time code message.

No MIDI sync signal is output.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Midi Sync Out" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the SETUP mode.

The current option (by default, "CLK") starts flashing.

flashing

Setting an MTC frame rate [“Frame Rate”]

Using the "Frame Rate" menu item, you can select the frame rate of MTC sent to an external MIDI device from

the MIDI OUT connector of the VF80EX.

When you make the "Midi Sync Out" setting to "MTC", you must set the frame rate appropriately to match the

frame rate of an external MIDI device (such as a sequencer, etc.).

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired frame rate

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected frame rate is set.

• Default:

25 (frames)

• Available options: 24, 25, 30df, 30nd, 29.97df, 29.97nd

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the SETUP mode.

<Note>

In the MTC specification, 29.97nd and 29.97df are

not available.

We recommend to use 30 or 30df except when you

have to synchronize the VF80EX with NTSC video.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Frame Rate" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current option (by default, "25") starts flashing.

flashing

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Setting an MTC offset value [“Mtc Offset Set”]

Using the "Mtc Offset Set" menu item, you can set the offset between the internal ABS time and the output

MTC. If you set "Midi Sync Out" to "MTC", you must make MTC offset setting. The default offset is

"00H59M57S00F00SF", which means "00H59M57S00F00SF" of MTC is output at the ABS0 ("00M00S00F00SF")

position. By setting the MTC offset mode (described below) appropriately, you can also set the offset between

the musical start point (at "bar 1/beat 1/clock 00") and the output MTC.

• Default:

00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF

• Available options: 00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF to

23H 59M 59S 29F 99SF

flashing

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to select the editing point

and use the [JOG] dial to select the desired value.

<Note>

If you set the MTC offset mode to "ABS" (see below) and

wish to start a song from "1H 00M 00M 00S 00F" of

MTC, the default setting allows you to have three sec-

ond preroll time.

After setting all fields, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The entered offset value is set.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the SETUP mode.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Mtc Offset Set" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the "Mtc Offset Set" screen, on which

the current offset is shown.

By default, "00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF" is shown, where

"57" is flashing, showing that this field can be edited.

Setting an MTC Offset mode [“Offset Mode”]

Using the "Mtc Offset Mode" menu item, you can select whether the MTC time set by "MTC offset" is output at

the ABS0 position (00H 00M 00S 00F 00SF) or the musical starting position ("001BAR 1 00CLK") on the

tempo map.

<Notes>

• If you set the MTC offset mode to "ABS" and wish to start a song from the MTC "1H 00M 00S 00F" position, we

recommend to have 3-second preroll by setting the MTC offset to "00H 59M 57S 00F".

If you set the MTC offset mode to "BAR ", a 2-bar preroll is automatically set, therefore, you should set the MTC offset

to zero ("00H 00M 00S 00F").

• If you set the MTC offset mode to "BAR " and run the VF80EX in sync with a sequencer software on your personal

computer via MTC, the tempo may be gradually shifted though the same tempo map is used. This is because the speed

of the VF80EX and your personal computer may not be exactly the same.

Some sequencer software can read the tempo output from the VF80EX correctly, therefore, we recommend to adjust

the tempo of your personal computer to the tempo of the VF80EX.

Note that, if your personal computer runs in sync with a MIDI clock message instead of an MTC message, there will be

no problem.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

• Default:

ABS

lect "Offset Mode" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently selected offset mode starts flashing (by

default, "ABS" is selected).

• Available offset modes: ABS (ooh 00m 00s 00f) or

"BAR (001 bar 1 )

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

flashing

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired offset mode

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

The selected offset mode will be set.

[ABS] (default) The MTC offset value you set is output

at the ABS 0 (00h 00m 00s 00f) position.

[BAR ]

The MTC offset time is output at the

musical starting position (001bar 1beat

00clk) on the Tempo Map.

Setting the Slave mode [“Slave Mode”]

Using the "Slave Mode" menu item, you can switch on or off the slave mode.

When switching the slave mode "On", the VF80EX can run in sync with an external device via an MTC.

To run in sync with an external device, you also must select the external sync signal by the "Slave Type" menu

item.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired slave mode

("On" or "Off") and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Default:

• Available options:

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Off

On or Off

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

If you select "On" in step 2, "SLAVE" flashes on the

Normal screen. While the VF80EX is locked to an ex-

ternal master, "SLAVE" lights steadily.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Slave Mode" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently selected slave mode starts flashing (by

default, "Off" is selected).

flashing

Setting the Slave type [“SlaveType”]

Using the "Slave Type" menu item, you can select the slave type when the VF80EX runs as a slave of an

external master.

• Default:

• Available options:

Vari

<Notes>

Vari, Free, SPDIF

• Regardless of slave type selection, the VF80EX needs

to receive an MTC from an external device.

• The rechase window of the VF80EX is fixed to 10

frames. This means that, when the slave (VF80EX)

timecode shifts off the master more than 10 frames,

the VF80EX judges that the chase-lock is not achieved

and rechases the master. While rechasing the master,

audio is muted. Note that if the timecode difference

between the slave and master is within 10 frames, the

VF80EX accepts it and does not rechase the master.

• The digital signal selected when the slave mode is set

to "On" is used for the external synchronization.

This is different from the digital signal selection for

digital audio recording (see "Digital input setting" de

scribed later).

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

After the chase-lock is achieved, the VF80EX

switches to run freely according to the internal

clock or the clock received from the digital input.

It does not chase the master even if the VF80EX

timecode shifts off the master timecode.

lect "SlaveType" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently selected slave type starts flashing (by

default, "Vari" is selected).

Free

After the chase-lock is achieved, the VF80EX

always check the timecode difference and runs

in the vari-speed mode to chase the master.

However, when the digital input is selected, it

runs the same as "Free" described above.

Vari

(default)

flashing

After the chase-lock is achieved, the VF80EX

runs freely according to the S/PDIF clock when

an S/PDIF digital signal is fed from the master.

However, when the digital input is selected, it

runs according to the digital input clock.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired slave type

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected slave type is set.

SPDIF

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

Setting the Recording protect function [“Rec Protect”]

Using the "Rec Protect" menu item, you can select the recording protection "On" or "Off". This is similar to the

"recording protection tabs" of a cassette tape. When it is set to "On", you cannot make recording, paste or

erase data, etc.

• Default:

• Available options: On, Off

Off

<Note>

If you try to make recording, paste or erase data while

[Rec Protect] is set to "On", [Protected] is shown on the

display for a second and the operation is canceled.

To make the operation possible, set [Rec Protect] to "Off".

* The setting is applicable program by program.

* You can save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Rec Protect" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "Off"

is selected).

flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select "0n" or "Off", and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selection is set.

Off (default) You can make recording, paste or

erase data, etc.

You cannot make recording, paste or

erase data, etc.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Setting Digital input [“Digital In”]

Using the [Digital In] menu item, you can select whether or not assigning the S/PDIF digital signal received

from the S/P DIF DATA INPUT (COAXIAL) connector to tracks 7 and 8.

By setting this item to "On", you can record an S/P DIF signal from an external digital device (such as a CD, MD

or DAT player) to tracks 7 and 8 of the VF80EX.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

• Default:

• Available options: On, Off

* This setting is common to all programs on the same disc.

* You cannot save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Off

<Notes>

• When "Digital In" is set to "On", "DIGI IN" is shown

on the Normal screen. When the VF80EX is receiving

a valid S/PDIF digital signal and locks to it, "DIGI IN"

lights steadily. When the VF80EX is not receiving a

valid S/PDIF digital signal, "DIGI IN" flashes. In such

a case, check the connection to the external device,

as well as the digital output setting of the external

device.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Digital In" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "Off"

is selected).

• While "Digital In" is set to "On", entering the bounce,

training or mastering mode automatically switches

the "Digital In" setting to "Off". Therefore, to make

digital recording again later, make the "Digital In"

setting to "On" again.

flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select "0n" or "Off", and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

If you select "On" and press the [ENTER/YES] key, a

warning message appears on the display. By rotating

the [JOG] dial, you can read the full text.

If you agree to the text of the message, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key again to make setting to "On".

Setting Bar/beat resolution mode [“ Resolution”]

Using the " Resolution" menu item, you can select on/off of the bar/beat resolution mode. By default, the

mode is set to "Off". By setting the mode to "On" and selecting the timebase on the screen to "bar/beat/clock",

the value in the clock field is rounded off when assigning a position to a memory key. In other words, stored

point data has beat accuracy. Using this function, you can store the IN, OUT, START, END or TO point on-the-

fly with beat accuracy, which allows to make editing (copy, move, paste, etc.) with beat accuracy.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

For example, we assume that the timebase on the screen

is set to "bar/beat/clock" and you are going to store

points at "001BAR 1 46CLK" and "002BAR 4 51CLK"

as the START and END points, respectively.

lect "ÅÙResolution" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "Off" is

selected).

If " Resolution" is set to "Off", the points are stored as

they are above. If " Resolution" is set to "On", the points

are stored as below (note that we assume the time sig-

nature is set to 4/4).

001 bar 1 46 clk -> 001 bar 1 00 clk

(The clock value (46) is rounded down.)

flashing

002 bar 4 51 clk -> 003 bar 1 00 clk

(A clock value (51) is rounded up.)

Use the [JOG] dial to select "0n" or "Off", and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected option is set.

• Default:

Off

• Available options: On, Off

* This setting is common to all programs on the same disc.

* You cannot save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Setting the MIDI device number [“Device ID”]

Using the "Device ID" menu item, you can set a device ID of the VF80EX. which is needed for controlling the

VF80EX from a sequencer software application, etc. via MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

Note that the transmitting device ID of the VF80EX follows this setting. You can set a desired device ID

between 00 and 99.

When the VF80EX receives a message for device ID [7F], the VF80EX recognizes the message and reacts to it

regardless of the "Device ID" setting.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a desired MIDI device ID

number, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Default:

• Available device IDs: 00 through 99

The selected ID number is set.

* This setting is common to all programs on the same disc.

* You cannot save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Device ID" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "00" is

selected).

flashing

Checking the number of track events [“Number Of Event”]

From the "Number Of Event" menu item, you can check the number of events for each track.

A program on the VF80EX consists of "audio files" and "silent (0) files" for tracks (including additional tracks).

Each audio or silent file is called an "event". This menu item shows the number of events on each track, which

is, in other words, the total number of audio and additional files on each track. As described earlier, the

VF80EX can manage up to 512 events per track on each program, which is enough in most cases even if you

make very complicated editing (also remember that the VF80EX optimization function helps reducing the

number of events). However, when you use the "24-hour recording" capability of the VF80EX and carry out a

large number of recording and editing operations, you should mind the number of events does not exceed

512. In such a case, we recommend to check the number of events for each track using the "Number Of Event"

menu item before recording or editing.

See "Event" on page 11 for details about audio files and events.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Number Of Event" and press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The display changes to show the "Number Of Event"

screen, in which you can see the number of events

currently existing on each track.

You can scroll the list to see the number of events on

each track (1 through 24) by rotating the [JOG] dial.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

indicates that invisible information exists under the

screen. In the screen example below, "***" shows the

number of events.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

The Drive Format Information [“Drive Information”]

From the "Drive Information" menu item, you can check the format information of the current drive.

If you have any trouble with your VF80EX and contact your nearest Fostex service station, this information is

very important and helpful for us in giving quick service.

You can see the following drive information.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Drive Information" and press the [ENTER/YES]

1. Manufacture/Model of the currently installed hard

disk

2. Format method

key.

The display changes to show the "Drive Information"

screen, in which you can see the current drive infor-

mation.

3. Format type

indicates that invisible information exists under the

screen.

4. Number of tracks available for recording/playback

5. Number of bits at formatting

6. Sampling frequency at formatting

7. Number of programs on the disk

8. Number of free blocks on the disk

9. Largest number of audio files/events among

programs and the associated program number.

10. Total capacity of the drive

11. Remaining space of the drive

12. Software version at formatting

You can scroll the list to see the item you want to

check by rotating the [JOG] dial.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

Fader Fix Mode Setting [“Fader Fix”]

By setting the "Fader Fix" menu item to "On", you can disable the operation of the track and master faders on

the panel.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "On" or "Off", and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected option is set.

The fader fix mode is effective only when the "Fader

Recall" menu item (described below) is set to "On".

In all modes, the operation of controlling

the track and master faders is ignored and

does not change the sound level.

• Default:

• Available Options: On or Off

Off

* This setting is common to all programs on the same disc.

* You cannot save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

The operation of controlling the track and

master faders reflects the sound level.

Off (default)

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

lect "Fader Fix" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "Off"

is selected).

flashing

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETUP mode (VF80EX)

Fader Recall mode Setting [“Fader Recall”]

Using the "Fader Recall" menu item, you can select whether or not recalling the track and master fader

settings when recalling a scene.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired option, and

• Default:

Off

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• Available Options: Off, Track, Master, Trk&Mst

* This setting is common to all programs on the same disc.

* You cannot save the setting as a part of the song data.

* The setting remains effective even after you power off and then

on.

The selected option is set.

When recalling a scene, the settings of track

and master faders are not recalled. There-

fore, the fader positions do not change from

the positions before recalling the scene.

Off (default)

Track

On the Select Menu screen of the SETUP mode, se-

When recalling a scene, the track fader set-

tings are recalled, while the master fader

setting is not recalled.

lect "Fader Recall" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The current setting starts flashing (by default, "Off" is

selected).

When recalling a scene, the master fader

setting is recalled, while the track fader set-

tings are not recalled.

Master

When recalling a scene, both the track and

master fader settings are recalled.

Trk & Mst

flashing

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeat-

edly until the VF80EX exits the SETUP mode.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications (VF80EX)

(Digital Multitracker)

Model VF80EX

Date:

Version: V1.00

MIDI Implementation Chart

Transmitted

Recognized

Remarks

Function....................

Basic

Default

Channel

Changed

Default

Message

Altered

Mode

********************************

Note

True Voice

Number:

********************************

Velocity

Note ON

Note OFF

After

Key’s

Channel’s

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change

True #

********************************

System Exclusive

(rem. 1)

(rem. 2)

: Quarter Frame

: Song Position

: Song Select

: Tune

Common

: Clock

System

Real Time : Commands

(rem. 3)

: Local ON/OFF

: All Notes OFF

Aux.

: Active Sense

Message

: Reset

rem.1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply

rem.2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry

Notes

rem.3: START, STOP, CONTINUE

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

: Yes

X: No

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications (VF80EX)

MMC Command List

Command list

STOP

Movement (Recorder)

01: STOP

02: PLAY

PLAY

03: DEFERRED PLAY

04: FAST FORWARD

05: REWIND

DEFERRED PLAY

F FWD

REWIND

06: RECORD STROBE

07: RECORD EXIT

09: PAUSE

REC

PUNCH OUT

STOP

40: WRITE

Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

LOCATE to Setting Data

CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)

Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

41: MASKED WRITE

42: READ

44: LOCATE

46: SEARCH

47: SHUTTLE

4C: MOVE

4D: ADD

4E: SUBTRACT

MMC Response/Information Field List

01: SELECTED TIME CODE

03: REQUESTED OFFSET

04: ACTUAL OFFSET

08: GP 0

Command

READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

READ/WRITE

READ

READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

READ

09: GP 1

0A: GP 2

0B: GP 3

0C: GP 4

0D: GP 5

0E: GP 6

0F: GP 7

48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY

4C: RECORD MODE

4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS

4F: TRACK RECORD READY

51: RECORD MONITOR

READ/WRITE

READ

READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE

READ/WRITE

Inquiry Message List

IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7

IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 13, 05, **, **, **, **, F7

:Fostex ID

01, 00

13, 05

**, **, **, **

:Device family code

:Device family number VF80EX

:Software version

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications (VF80EX)

Maintenance

Cleaning the exterior

* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth.

For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off.

Then polish with a dry cloth. Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will

damage the printing and finish of the exterior.

Specifications

Recording/Reproducing

Recording Medium

Recording Format

Save/Load Format

Sampling Frequency

Quantization

A/D Converter

D/A Converter

No. of Recording Track

3.5 inch, hard disk (E-IDE type)

FDMS-3 (*)

FDIO-1 (**)

44.1kHz

16-bit linear (Non expanded)

20-bit 64 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma

24-bit 128 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma

8 real tracks + 16 additional tracks

*2 tracks for simultaneous recording (Maximum)

+/- 6%

Vari Pitch Control

Crossfade

Recording/Reproducing Frequency

10msec.

20Hz ~ 20kHz

Input/Output

Input A, B

Connector

ø6mm Phone jack (Unbalanced)

XLR-3-31 type connector (Balanced)

50kΩ or more (Unbalanced)

1kΩ or more (Balanced)

Input Impedance

Standard Input Level

Phantom Power (XLR only)

-50 ~ +4dBu

+48VDC (Setting of ON/OFF with PHANTOM switch)

HEADPHONE

Connector

Load Impedance

Output Level

ø6mm TRS Phone jack

10Ω ~ 50Ω

20mW or more (at 32Ω)

STEREO OUT L, R

Connector

Load Impedance

Output Level

ø6mm Phone jack

10kΩ or more

-10dBV

S/P DIF DIGITAL IN

Connector

Format

COAXIAL

IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)

DIGITAL OUT

Connector

Format

COAXIAL

IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)

MIDI IN/OUT

Connector

PUNCH IN/OUT

Connector

DIN 5 PIN

ø6mm Phone jack (An optional FOOT SW Model 8051

can be connected.)

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications (VF80EX)

General

Dimensions

Weight

Power Supply

Power Consumption

307 (W) x 108 (H) x 217 (D) mm

Approx. 3.3kg

120VAC 60Hz, 230V~ 50/60Hz (AC inlet type)

20W

Accessories

Owner’s manual

Power Cable

* Fostex Disk Management System-3

** Fostex Data In Out-1

Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement.

Block Diagram

EFF

TRK 1

PAN

2BAND EQ

GAIN

MUTE

EFFECT

PAN

PRE/POST

ASP

EFFECT

PHANTOM (+48V)

EFFECT

SEND LEVEL

MUTE

EFFECT

RTN LEVEL

TRK 2

2BAND EQ

GAIN

MUTE

EFFECT

PAN

PRE/POST

TRK 3

PEAK

to METER

INPUT A

2BAND EQ

GAIN

MUTE

AD/C

REC

REP

EFFECT

PAN

PRE/POST

OFF

REP

TRK 4

TRIM

PHANTOM (+48V)

REC

2BAND EQ

GAIN

MUTE

to METER

REP

EFFECT

PAN

PRE/POST

HDR

TRK 5

DA/C

MUTE

GAIN

2BAND EQ

GAIN

MUTE

BOUNCE

ST OUT

EFFECT

PAN

PRE/POST

MASTERING

INPUT B

REC

TRK 6

AD/C

OFF

2BAND EQ

GAIN

PEAK

PHONES

MUTE

TRIM

BOUNCE

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 7/8

DATA OUT

ENCODE

BALANCE

S/P DIF

DATA IN

MUTE

DECODE

GAIN

S/P DIF

2 TRK

MASTERING

EFFECT

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications (VF80EX)

Block Diagram (when using the insert effect)

ON/OFF

INSERT

EFFECT

OUT Level

PHANTOM (+48V)

TRK 1

MUTE

2BAND EQ

PAN

GAIN

PEAK

TRK 2

MUTE

2BAND EQ

REC EFF

to METER

TRK 3

MUTE

INPUT A

CH ON/OFF

REC 1

REP 1

AD/C

REC 2

REC 3

REC 4

REC 5

REC 6

REP 2

TRK 4

MUTE

PAN

TRIM

REP 3

REP 4

REP 5

REP 6

REP 7

GAIN

PHANTOM (+48V)

to METER

TRK 5

MUTE

DA/C

MUTE

TRK 6

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

ST OUT

REC 7

REC 8

Effect Track

PHONES LEVEL

TRK 7/8

MUTE

INPUT B

REP 8

AD/C

GAIN

BALANCE

CH ON/OFF

PHONES

PEAK

TRIM

DATA OUT

ENCODE

S/P DIF

DATA IN

DECODE

S/P DIF

Normal

Dimensions

I N P U T

O U T P U T

I N P U T

O U T P U T O F F O N

M I D I

A T

D I F S / P D A

O M

P H A N T

P O W E R

307

INPUT

BAL

ST OUT

FOOT SW

INPUT

BAL

PHONES

MIX PARAMETER

SCENE SCENE SEQ.

TRACK

EDIT

GUITAR

PGM

PAN

FADER

MAP

EFFECT

LINE

MIC

LINE

MIC

MIN

MAX

UNBAL

TRIM

UNBAL

TRIM

ON/OFF

ACCESS

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

MASTERING

TRAINING

CH ON/OFF

PEAK

PHANTOM

REC EFF

OFF

RED

REC

GREEN

MUTE

PLAY

TRACK STATUS

STATUS

/SEL

TRACK STATUS

TRACK SEL

JOG SHUTTLE

7/8 2TRK

CURSOR

MASTER

EXIT

/NO

EJECT

ENTER

/YES

TIMEBASE

SEL

UNDO

/REDO

SETUP

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

SHIFT

-10

-20

-10

-20

LOCATE

WAVE FORM

SCRUB

AUTO

PUNCH

VARI

LOOP

EDIT

PITCH

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

EDIT

CD PLAY

MARK

DELETE

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REWIND

FWD

-∞

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Declaration of EC Directive

This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member

nation's ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

- Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used

within the specified voltage range.

The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment

The affect of the European Specification EN61000-6-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common

immunity specification) on this equipment are as shown below.

* In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields, power

frequency magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging environment, this

could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.

FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE

* Including non-EU countries (as of October, 2003).

<ITALY>

NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.

ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria

TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074

NAME: Proel S.p.A.

ADD: Zona Via Alla Ruenia, 37/43 64027-Sant’Omero

(Teramo), Italy

TEL: (+39) 0861-81241, FAX: (+39) 0861-887862

NAME: General Audio

NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.

ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The

Netherlands

ADD: Albert Temmerstraat 21, 1731 Zellik, Belgium

TEL: (+32) 2-4630650, FAX: (+32) 2-4661500

TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201

NAME: SC Sound ApS

ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark

TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077

NAME: Fitzpatrick

ADD: P. B. 4316 Nydalen, 0402 Oslo, Norway

TEL: (+47) 23 400 380, FAX: (+47) 23 400 389

NAME: Noretron Oy Audio

ADD: P. O. Box 22, FIN-02631 Espoo, Finland

TEL: (+358) 9-5259330, FAX: (+358) 9-52593352

NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.

ADD: Praca do Bom Sucesso, No 61 Bom Sucesso Trade

Center, Escritorio 701/702, 4150-1460 Porto, Portugal

TEL: (+351) 22-608-06-10, FAX: (+351) 22-608-06-29

NAME: Sennheiser France

ADD: 128 bis, avenue Jean-Jaures, 94851 Ivry-sur-Seine

Cedex, France

TEL: (+33) 1 4987 0300, FAX: (+33) 1 4987 0324

<SPAIN>

NAME: Letusa S. A.

ADD: C/Laguna, No 10, 28923 Alcorcon, Madrid, Spain

TEL: (+34) 91-4862800, FAX: (+34) 91-6414597

NAME: Mega Audio GmbH

ADD: Stromberger Str. 32, D-55411 Bingen, Germany

TEL: (+49) 6721-94330, FAX: (+49) 6721-32046

NAME: TTS Scandinavia AB

ADD: Kavallerivagen 24, 172 48 Sundbyberg, Sweden

TEL: (+46) 8-59798000, FAX: (+46) 8-59798001

NAME: Bon Studio S. A.

NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG

ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland

TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558

ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece

TEL: (+30) 210-3809-605, 606, 607, 608

FAX: (+30) 210-3845-755, 210-3827-868

<UK>

NAME: SCV London

ADD: 40 Chigwell Lane, Oakwood Hill Industrial Estate,

Loughton, Essex IG10 3NY U.K.

TEL: (+44) 20-8418-0778, FAX: (+44) 20-8418-0624

NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.

ADD: ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK, ICELAND

TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FOSTEX CO.

3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021

FOSTEX AMERICA

15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.

396676

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dyson Vacuum Cleaner DCO3 User Manual
Electro Voice Portable Speaker MTH 25 42BT User Manual
Everpure Water System EV9273 75 User Manual
Fedders Heat Pump CH12 User Manual
Freecom Technologies Computer Drive Tough Drive Sport User Manual
Garland Cooktop GMIU35 User Manual
Genesis Advanced Technologies Speaker Gen 928 User Manual
GE Range 164D3333P069 User Manual
GE Washer LISR310 User Manual
Gitzo Camcorder Accessories GT1940C User Manual